ABB PickMaster Twin - PowerPac Applications Manual
โฆษณา
โฆษณา
ROBOTICS
Application manual
PickMaster
®
Twin - PowerPac
Trace back information:
Workspace Main version a394
Checked in 2021-03-25
Skribenta version 5.4.005
Application manual
PickMaster
®
Twin - PowerPac
IRC5 and OmniCore
Document ID: 3HAC064218-001
Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
Except as may be expressly stated anywhere in this manual, nothing herein shall be construed as any kind of guarantee or warranty by ABB for losses, damage to persons or property, fitness for a specific purpose or the like.
In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of this manual and products described herein.
This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB's written permission.
Keep for future reference.
Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB.
Original instructions.
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Welcome to PickMaster PowerPac
Hardware and software requirements ..........................................................
Camera requirements ..............................................................................
Installing PickMaster Twin Client ................................................................
PickMaster ® Twin Hardware connection illustration ......................................
Connecting cameras ................................................................................
Connecting I/O signals .............................................................................
Configuring networks ...............................................................................
Setting up robot controller ........................................................................
Optional robot and process configuration ....................................................
Six axes robot configuration ......................................................................
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac 69
Setting up Solution and Recipe in virtual Runtime (VRT) ...........................................
Adding Conveyor ....................................................................................
Switching to real Runtime .........................................................................
Configuring camera .................................................................................
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5
Table of contents
Calibrating linear conveyor .......................................................................
4.3.4.1 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 377) ........................
4.3.4.2 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000) ......................
4.3.4.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5) ......................................................
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore) ...............................................
Calibrating circular conveyor .....................................................................
4.3.5.1 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 377) ........................
4.3.5.2 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000) ......................
4.3.5.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5) ......................................................
4.3.5.4 Type configuration for circular conveyor ..........................................
Calibrating indexed work area ...................................................................
Verifying conveyor calibrations ..................................................................
4.3.8.1 Showing live images ....................................................................
4.3.8.2 Detailed vision information ............................................................
4.3.8.3 The image windows .....................................................................
Adding vision model ................................................................................
4.3.9.1 Vision modeling ..........................................................................
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax .....................................
4.3.9.3 Configuring blob models ...............................................................
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models .......................................................
Example: One pick work area and one place work area ............................................
Example: One pick from indexed work area and one place work area ..........................
Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas ..................................
AckItmTgt - Acknowledge an item target ......................................................
FlushItmSrc - Flush an item source .............................................................
GetItmTgt - Get the next item target ............................................................
NextItmTgtType - Get the type of the next item target .....................................
QStartItmSrc - Start queue in item source ....................................................
QStopItmSrc - Stop queue in item source ....................................................
ResetFlowCount - Reset flow counter .........................................................
ResetMaxUsageTime - Reset max measured usage time ................................
UseReachableTargets - Use reachable targets ..............................................
GetMaxUsageTime - Get max measured usage time ......................................
GetQueueLevel - Get queue level ...............................................................
GetQueueTopLevel - Get queue top level ....................................................
GetFlowCount - Get number of passed items ...............................................
selectiondata - Selection data ....................................................................
RAPID programs .....................................................................................
Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas ........................
Example: Mixing two pick work areas and one place work area ........................
6 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Table of contents
Example: Mixing with one pick and one place work area .................................
Example: Double pick single place .............................................................
Example: Placing a predefined pattern on indexed work area ..........................
Example: Selecting item depending on clearance zone ..................................
Example: Sorting in negative y-direction ......................................................
Example: Indexed work area with predefined position ....................................
Example: Automatically generating new positions to indexed work area ............
Warnings 4326 - 4329 ..............................................................................
The camera does not take pictures .............................................................
Robot does not move ...............................................................................
Bad or varying position accuracy ...............................................................
Positions are used twice ...........................................................................
Problem with camera resolution in PickMaster ..............................................
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7
This page is intentionally left blank
Overview of this manual
Overview of this manual
About this manual
This manual contains instructions for installation, configuration, and operation of
PickMaster PowerPac.
Usage
Who should read this manual?
This manual is intended for:
• Installation personnel
• Programmers
• Integrators
• Operators
Prerequisites
This manual should be used during installation, configuration, and maintenance of a PickMaster system.
PickMaster PowerPac is intended for use as an engineering tool on a portable laptop PC for offline use and online connection to a host computer in the installation for commissioning purposes. PickMaster PowerPac is not intended for use on the host computer under production conditions.
Any maintenance/repair/installation personnel working with an ABB robot must be trained by ABB and have the required knowledge of mechanical and electrical installation/repair/maintenance work.
Cybersecurity
Note
All safety information for working with the controller is described in the product manual for the controller.
This product is designed to be connected to and to communicate information and data via a network interface. It is your sole responsibility to provide, and continuously ensure, a secure connection between the product and to your network or any other network (as the case may be).
You shall establish and maintain any appropriate measures (such as, but not limited to, the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti-virus programs, etc) to protect the product, the network, its system and the interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB
Ltd and its entities are not liable for damage and/or loss related to such security breaches, any unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.
Continues on next page
9 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Overview of this manual
Continued
References
Tip
All documents can be found via myABB Business Portal, www.abb.com/myABB .
OmniCore
Reference
Product specification - PickMaster Twin
Document ID
3HAC073650-001
Circuit diagram - PickMaster Twin
Application manual - PickMaster Twin - Operator
3HAC024480-020
3HAC069977-001
3HAC031045-001 Safety manual for robot - Manipulator and IRC5 or OmniCore controller i
Product manual - OmniCore C30
Operating manual - OmniCore
Application manual - Controller software OmniCore
3HAC060860-001
3HAC065036-001
3HAC066554-001
Technical reference manual - Lubrication in gearboxes 3HAC042927-001 i
Technical reference manual - System parameters 3HAC065041-001
This manual contains all safety instructions from the product manuals for the manipulators and the controllers.
External references
Reference
Cognex Ethernet Camera Tool
Gigabit Ethernet Performance Driver aca1440-73gc sca1300-32gc
CognexPCConfigGuide
Description
For configuring camera networks.
For camera communication.
Information about Basler Ace Gigabit Ethernet cameras and the switch for Gigabit Ethernet cameras.
Information about Basler Scout Gigabit Ethernet cameras and the switch for Gigabit
Ethernet cameras.
Detailed information about PC requirements for the vision system.
Revisions
Revision
A
Description
First edition.
Continues on next page
10 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Revision
B
Overview of this manual
Continued
Description
Published in release 21A. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Added information on supporting OmniCore controller.
• Added description of accounts management and http protocol safety issue.
• Minor corrections.
• Added a note on refreshing the controller system list when adding a controller in PickMaster PowerPac.
• Added notes for real Runtime connection.
• Added description for new time sync service.
• Added note for RW7.2 about the firewall settings on WAN.
• Updated Job Tab option to Recipe .
• Added a note that the PickMaster 3 and PickMaster Twin are not recommended to be installed on a same PC.
• Updated the operation of editing users in PickMaster PowerPac.
• Updated the definition of Adjustment speed in section
Six axes robot configuration on page 44 .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
11
This page is intentionally left blank
1 Welcome to PickMaster PowerPac
1.1 Introduction
1 Welcome to PickMaster PowerPac
1.1 Introduction
About PickMaster
®
Twin
PickMaster® Twin is an application product designed for vision based high speed picking of random flow products on the fly. PickMaster® Twin supports ease-of use configuration, simulation and operation of a big variation of smaller or larger line layouts composed of a multitude of robots, cameras, conveyors and fixed work areas. It comprises all steps in the life cycle of a picking installation from proposal, engineering, commissioning, operation to maintenance and support.
PickMaster PowerPac can be customized for some of the following special needs:
• With the integrated vision it can be used for full random operation on a continuously moving conveyors and for absolute accurate positioning on indexed feeders or trays.
• Without vision recognition it can be used as a tool for the efficient production with guided product flows on multiple conveyors.
• For efficient quality inspection and product categorization alone or together with the position recognition.
PickMaster® Twin is a modular product for controlling ABB robots in picking applications through the robot controller. It is a configurable to perform pick and place operations of items. A vision system is used to find randomly placed items on conveying belts. PickMaster PowerPac is the engineering software aimed at configuring and validating the application in offline simulation with a virtual system and in online mode directly connected to the real installation. It uses comprehensive graphical interfaces to configure powerful applications, where it can control multiple robots picking and placing sensor-detected items on different conveying belts.
xx1900001745
PickMaster Twin comprises the following modules:
PickMaster
®
PowerPac
Ease of Use software for offline and online configuration and commissioning in a visual 3D environment, powered by RobotStudio™.
Continues on next page
13 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Welcome to PickMaster PowerPac
1.1 Introduction
Continued
PickMaster
®
Operator
State-of-the art user interface for operating PickMaster on the shop floor, built on
ABB’s Ability™ Zenon data management software.
PickMaster
®
Runtime
Efficient runtime operation software for orchestrating the coordination of the packaging process for a multitude of robots and conveyors including integrated vision software for precise robot guidance and quality inspection.
• Virtual Runtime: running the PickMaster process in a simulated virtual environment on a client system connected to virtual robot controllers.
• Real Runtime: running the PickMaster process in the real production installation on the host computer.
The following illustration is showing an installation example with 10 robots, 4 cameras and 3 conveyors.
Cameras
Multi touch operation panel
Cell/Line
PLC
GigE
NIC board
Win10 IoT
PickMaster RT
Operator
Zenon
Conveyors
Modbus
Profinet
…
PCIE Encoders
CTM
Win10
PowerPac
RobotStudio
Ethernet
Robots & Robot Controllers xx1900001746
Note
PickMaster® Twin is delivered with different hardware configurations. For more information, see Product specification - PickMaster Twin .
Note
Http protocol is uesd between PickMaster
® and PickMaster
®
PowerPac/PickMaster
®
Operator
Runtime. This could be unsafe if the user has specific safety rules. Please take necessary measurements to protect your information.
About PickMaster PowerPac
This manual describes how to install and use PickMaster PowerPac as the engineering software in two modes:
• Configuring and validating the application in offline simulation with a virtual system.
• Commissioning in online mode directly connected to the real installation.
This manual also describes the components of the real system, their installation, configuration and calibration.
14 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Welcome to PickMaster PowerPac
1.2 PickMaster PowerPac terms
1.2 PickMaster PowerPac terms
About these terms
Some words have a specific meaning when used in this manual. Definitions of these words in this manual are listed below. Some of the terms are put in their context when describing a picking and placing process.
Term list
Words that have italic font style in the definition column are included in the term list and have their own definitions.
Term
PickMaster PowerPac
PickMaster Operator
PickMaster Virtual Runtime The core engine that does all the calculation of virtual pick and place operation.
PickMaster Runtime
The market name of PickMaster Tablet software that is used for configuration and simulation.
PickMaster Twin Client
The core engine that does all the calculation of pick and place operation.
It's also called as Runtime.
The installation package which contains PickMaster PowerPac,
PickMaster Virtual Runtime and PickMaster Runtime.
PickMaster Twin Host
Definition
The market name of PickMaster PC software that is used for configuration and simulation.
Work area
Circular Conveyor
Item
The installation package which contains PickMaster Operator and PickMaster Runtime.
A defined picking and placing areas for the robots.
A conveyor that is in a circular type.
Item source
Container
The generic term for a specific object to be picked or placed in a PickMaster PowerPac application.
Defines how to generate item positions and which work area to send them to.
Defines which patterns to use and what items to use for each position in the patterns.
Recipe
Emulation
Ghost picking
Offline Simulation
'Project' in PickMaster 3, a collection of parameters with regard to the process of Pick and Place.
An activity of imitating the behavior of real cell or line and display the activity on screen.
A kind of dry run, when production uses virtual item to pick, thus no real item to pick.
A kind of simulation process when connected to the virtual robot.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
15
This page is intentionally left blank
2 Installation
2.1 PickMaster package
2 Installation
2.1 PickMaster package
Concepts of using PickMaster Twin
PickMaster PowerPac is designed to be installed on a laptop computer that can host solutions for many different installations that can be connected for commissioning, new recipe introduction, maintenance and servicing purposes to the several physical installations, where each one of those have their own permanent host computer.
There are two software installation packages: PickMaster Twin Client for the portable engineering system and PickMaster Twin Host for the permanent factory system.
The Client installation does not require any physical equipment installations. All physical component installations, configurations and calibrations are doneon the host system.
PickMaster Twin Client
The installations package for PickMaster Twin offline configuration, simulation and testing is named as PickMaster Twin Client. It installs the following softwares:
• PickMaster PowerPac
• PickMaster Virtual Runtime
• PickMaster Real Runtime
Note
This package is only intended for engineering and not for the final factory production installation. The ability to switch to real runtime on the same computer is only intended for test purposes and it can be used for creating and editing vision models offline. For this purpose a vision demo dongle can be used.
Software Installation Package
Registered ABB customers can download the latest version of the PickMaster Twin
Client and the user documentation for PickMaster PowerPac from the ABB download center.
Tip
The download center address is https://new.abb.com/products/robotics/application-software/pickmaster.
Note
The PickMaster software is available in 64-bit version.
Continues on next page
17 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.1 PickMaster package
Continued
When the PickMaster Twin Client is installed successfully, the user documentation for PickMaster PowerPac and the calibration papers are available in the installation folder Documentation .
Note
Any old version of PickMaster PowerPac must be uninstalled before installing a newer version of PickMaster PowerPac.
18 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.2.1 Hardware and software requirements
2.2 System requirements
2.2.1 Hardware and software requirements
Hardware requirements
Following are the hardware requirements
• A log on account with administrator rights on the computer.
• CPU: 2.0 GHz or faster processor. Multicore processor is recommended.
• Memory: 3 GB if running Windows 32-bit edition. 8 GB if running Windows
64 bit edition. 16 GB or more if working with heavy CAD models.
• Free disk space: 10+ GB free space, solid state drive (SSD) recommended.
• Graphics card: High-performance, DirectX 11 compatible, gaming graphics card from any of the leading vendors. For the Advanced lightning mode
Direct3D feature level 10_1 or higher is required.
• Display settings: 1920 x 1080 pixels or higher resolution is recommended.
• Dots per inch (DPI): Only Normal size supported for Integrated Vision.
• Mouse: Three-button mouse
• 3D Mouse (optional): Any 3D mouse from 3DConnexion. See http://www.3dconnexion.com.
Note
When running the software, close other software that consumes a lot of memory, otherwise it will affect the software normal use.
CAUTION
If robot movement can be initiated from an external control panel then an emergency stop must also be available.
Software requirements
Following are the software requirements:
• Windows 10 (64 bit).
• Acrobat reader
• Robotstudio 2020.1 or later
• RobotWare 6.11 or later
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
19
2 Installation
2.2.2 Ethernet switch
2.2.2 Ethernet switch
Overview
An Ethernet switch is used to connect the PC with multiple robot controllers. It is recommended to use an unmanaged industrial switch with a communication speed of 100 Mbit/s or higher. Switches that implement the 1588 PTP protocol have been known to interfere with the robot controller communication and should not be used.
20 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.2.3 Vision system
2.2.3 Vision system
Overview
Vision system requirements
The supported network card for Ethernet camera communication is Intel Pro/1000PT
Dual Port Server Adapter. Other network interface cards can work, but have not been tested.
A Cognex USB license is required for the Gigabit Ethernet vision system. The USB stick must be connected when Runtime is running.
The maximum number of cameras that can be used is ten.
Insert the vision network card in a free compatible PCI-express slot (PCI-express x4, x8, or x16).
Color vision
PickMaster PowerPac can acquire images and generate targets by using cameras that communicate over Ethernet. An Ethernet network (network interface card, cables, switches) is used for communication between the cameras and the Runtime
PC. Trigger/Strobe and power voltage is connected to a Hirose 12-pin/6-pin connector on the camera housing. Preferably the power voltage to the Ethernet camera is supplied from a separate source that is independent of the robot controller.
Color vision is available as a standard function and has the following features:
• connectivity for color cameras
• white balance calibration
• color filter configuration
Note
This allows you to define colour filters that will run as a prestep to PatMax and Blob. The filter is available in Standalone, alignment, and sub inspection modes.
The vision system has been tested with the
Basler Scout ScA1300-32gc
,
Basler Scout scA1390-17gm and Basler Ace acA1440-73gc cameras.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
21
2 Installation
2.2.4 Camera requirements
2.2.4 Camera requirements
Mounting
The cameras must be mounted in a very stable way to avoid vibration and other dynamic movement. The cameras can be mounted in any orientation to the image area.
Lighting
Even lighting of the image area is very important to obtain reliable results.
Other camera requirements
If the camera is mounted on a moving conveyor then it is necessary to have a progressive scan camera (non-interlaced).
We recommend using a camera that supports electronic shutter control. Then it is possible to set the exposure from PickMaster PowerPac, otherwise the exposure time must be manually set on the camera.
Camera configuration
Some cameras will need manual configuration to fulfill the above conditions. For detailed information about camera settings, see Cognex manual and PickMaster
Release Notes .
For specific information about Basler Gigabit Ethernet cameras, see
Recommendation for lenses
When planning a cell it is important to choose a suitable camera/lens setup that gives an appropriate field of view (FOV).
The FOV of a camera is determined by three factors:
• The distance between the camera and the scene.
• The focal length of the lens.
• The size of the camera's sensor chip (normally specified as the distance of the diagonal of the chip, expressed in inches).
Continues on next page
22 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.2.4 Camera requirements
Continued
The graphic below shows the geometry of the optical setup.
xx0900000550
A
B
C
C
D f
E
H
W
Sensor chip
Lens
Chip height (mm)
Chip width (mm)
Distance from lens to scene (mm)
Scene
Focal length of camera (mm)
Scene height (mm)
Scene width (mm)
To select a suitable lens, measure the distance between the camera and the items
(D), and the size of the image area (W*H).
To calculate the appropriate focal length of the lens:
• If the height of the image area is most important: f = (D/W)*Cw
• If the length of the image area is most important: f = (D/H)*Ch xx0900000565
The table below lists the width and height of some common sensor chip sizes, expressed in millimeters.
Sensor chip size (inch)
1/4"
1/3"
1/2"
2/3"
C h
(mm)
2.4
3.6
4.8
6.6
C w
(mm)
3.2
4.8
6.4
8.8
A shorter focal length gives a wider field of view, that is the returned value is the maximum focal length to obtain the specified W and H.
Continues on next page
23 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.2.4 Camera requirements
Continued
Example: lens calculation
This example is based on a 1/2" sensor chip, such as the Basler Scout 1390-17gm.
• The FOV should cover a conveyor belt with a width of 500 mm.
• The minimum height of the FOV is not restricted.
• The distance between the camera and the conveyor is 800 mm.
• The camera is mounted with the belly facing the robot (PickMaster default).
Because the width of the conveyor determines the minimum FOV the required focal length is calculated using: f = (D/W)*Cw
Enter the known data, C w is 6.4mm (see graphic above).
f = (800/500)*6.4 = 10.24 mm
The resulting height H of the FOV is calculated as:
H = D*CH/f = 800*4.8/10.24 = 375 mm
Alternative with increased height
To increase the height of the FOV (H), the camera can be rotated 90° so that the height dimension of the sensor chip (4.8 mm) is aligned with the width dimension of the conveyor. The width dimension (6.4 mm) is aligned with the x-axis of the conveyor.
f = (800/500)*4.8 = 7.68 mm
The resulting height H of the FOV is now:
H = 800*6.4/7.68 = 666 mm
Normally lenses are available in some standard focal lengths. Choose a lens that has a focal length shorter than the calculated value to be sure to capture the entire scene.
24 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.3 PickMaster PowerPac license
2.3 PickMaster PowerPac license
Introduction to licensing
A license activation key provided by ABB must be installed and activated to run
PickMaster PowerPac.
PickMaster PowerPac depends on the activation of Robotstudio. You can use
PickMaster PowerPac normally only if you activate RS with a license that includes the PickMaster PowerPac option. It can also be activated separately from PickMaster
PowerPac, but still invokes the RS activation procedure.
PickMaster PowerPac license options
Two license options are available for PickMaster PowerPac, Basic and Premium.
Users can obtain the Basic option for free and work with limited functions. The
Premium option provides more functions for professional integrators and commissioners.
Comparison between license options
The following table lists the main application scenarios and differences between two license options.
RobotWare option
RobotStudio requirment
Runtime
Solution/layout
Recipe
Simulation
Basic
PickMaster cell ready
Unactivated
Real (default)
Adjust/Save
Create/Save
Offline simulation
Ghost picking/emulation
Premium
PickMaster cell ready
Activated
Virtual (default)
Create/Save
Create/Save
Offline simulation
Ghost picking/emulation
Information about the current license
Use the following procedure to get information about the current license.
1
2
3
4
5
Action
Start the Robotstudio 2019.
Click the File tab.
Click Options .
Click Licensing .
Click the View install license...
to get information about the current license.
Note
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
25
2 Installation
2.3 PickMaster PowerPac license
Continued
Activating a license key
Activating a license key automatically over the Internet
Use this procedure to activate a license key automatically over the Internet.
1
2
3
4
Action
To start the licencing application, either use:
• In the PickMaster PowerPac, on the Options menu, click Activate License .
Under Standalong License , choose I want to Activate a standalong license key and click Next .
Under Automatic Activation , choose Activate RobotStudio over the internet and click Next .
Enter your 25 character Activation Key (xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx) and click
Next .
Your activation request will be sent to ABB over the Internet.
If you are using a valid Activation Key that has not expired or exceeded the number of activations allowed, your PickMaster PowerPac license will be activated immediately, and your PickMaster PowerPac is ready for use when started next time.
Activating a license key manually
If the computer with PickMaster PowerPac installed does not have an Internet connection, you must activate the license manually. This is done in three steps:
1 Create a license request file (
*.licreqx
).
2 Download a license file ( *.bin
) using an Internet connected computer.
3 Install the license file ( *.bin
).
Use this procedure to activate a PickMaster PowerPac license manually.
2
3
5
6
7
8
1
4
9
10
11
12
Action
To start the licensing application either use:
• In the PickMaster PowerPac, on the Options menu, click Verify License .
In the licensing application, click PickMaster License Activation Wizard...
.
Under Automatic Activation , select Step 1: Create a license request file and click
Next .
Enter your 25 character Activation Key (xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx-xxxxx) and click
Next .
Click Save Request .
Type a name for a license request file (*.licreqx), browse to a suitable folder, and click
Save .
Click Finish .
Use a removable medium, such as a USB device, to transfer the license request file to a computer with an Internet connection.
On the computer with internet connection, start the internet browser, and go to the link http://www.manualactivation.e.abb.com/ and follow the instructions to activate your license manually. You are instructed to browse for the saved license request file.
The result will be a license file (*.bin) that you must save.
Transfer the license file to the PickMaster PowerPac PC.
On the PickMaster PowerPac computer, start the licensing application.
Under Automatic Activation , select Step 3: Install a license file (*.bin) and click Next .
Continues on next page
26 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.3 PickMaster PowerPac license
Continued
13
Action
Follow the wizard instructions.
The PickMaster license will now be activated for the PickMaster PowerPac and the
Runtime, and the PickMaster installation ready to use.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
27
2 Installation
2.4 PickMaster time synchronization service
2.4 PickMaster time synchronization service
Time synchronization service
PickMaster Twin uses a time synchronization service to synchronize the time between the robot controllers and the host PC running PickMaster. The synchronization is performed over the same network used for communication between PickMaster Runtime and the robot controllers.
Note
To enable the time synchronization service, the user should select the local IP address which is connected to the real controller during installing the PickMaster
Twin Client.
If the computer is not yet connected to a real controller, the IP address could also be configured after the installation.
Settings
The synchronization service is based on the precision time protocol (PTP), which in turn implements the IEEE 1588 standard. This protocol uses multicast messages over UDP/IP and requires that UDP port 319 and 320 are available (for both incoming and outgoing traffic). It is therefore necessary that any firewall is not blocking these ports. Please contact your system administrator to make sure that the proper configurations are performed.
PTP was originally defined in the IEEE 1588-2002 standard, officially entitled
"Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked
Measurement and Control Systems" and published in 2002. In 2008, IEEE 1588-2008 was released as a revised standard; also known as PTP Version 2, it improves accuracy, precision and robustness but is not backward compatible with the original
2002 version.
The time synchronization service must be set to operate on the correct PC network interface port, that is, the network port which communicates with the robot controllers.
28 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.5 Software installation
2.5 Software installation
Note
Anyone working with installation of an ABB robot must be trained by ABB and have the required knowledge of mechanical and electrical installation work.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
29
2 Installation
2.5.1 Installing RobotStudio
2.5.1 Installing RobotStudio
Instruction
For the detailed RobotStudio installation procedure, see
Operating manual - RobotStudio ,
3HAC032104-001 .
30 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.5.2 Installing PickMaster Twin Client
2.5.2 Installing PickMaster Twin Client
Procedure
Installing PickMaster Twin Client
Note
The PickMaster 3 and PickMaster Twin Client are not recommended to be installed on a same PC.
They may influence each other.
Note
The PickMaster Twin Client and PickMaster Twin Host are not recommended to be installed on a same PC.
Note
The PickMaster Twin 1.0 is for IRC5 controller.
The PickMaster Twin 1.1 is for OmniCore controller.
Note
Make sure that you have installed RobotStudio on your computer before installing
PickMaster Twin Client. For the installation procedure of RobotStudio, see
Operating manual - RobotStudio .
Use the following procedure to install the PickMaster Twin Client:
1 Browse to the PickMaster Twin Client installation package and double-click
Setup.exe
.
The installation starts.
xx1900001752
2 Click Next .
3 Read the license agreement and accept the terms.
4 Click Next .
5 Choose to install the Congnex vision driver and click Next .
6 Click Next .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
31
2 Installation
2.5.2 Installing PickMaster Twin Client
Continued
7 Choose an IP address for network adaptor configuration and click Next .
Note
To enable the time synchronization service, the user should select the local
IP address which is connected to the real controller during installing the
PickMaster Twin Client.
If the computer is not yet connected to a real controller, the IP address could also be configured after the installation. For detailed information, see
Configuring local IP address on page 32
.
8 Click Next to start the installation.
9 When the installation is complete, choose to restart the computer now or later and click Finish ..
Configuring local IP address
The local IP address should be reconfigured in the PickMaster Runtime (RRT) in the following cases:
• Previous IP configuration during installation is wrong.
• The network interface currently used for connecting the real controller has been changed.
Start Runtime, click File - Options to open a pop-up dialog. Select the corresponding interface in the list box and click OK.
Note that the network interface configurated in Runtime must be the IP address of the local computer connected to the controller using WAN interface.
Use the following procedure to configure the local IP address in the PickMaster
Runtime (RRT):
1 Start Runtime.
2 Click File Options to open a pop-up dialog.
xx2100000346
Continues on next page
32 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.5.2 Installing PickMaster Twin Client
Continued
3 Select the corresponding IP address in the list box and click OK .
xx2100000347
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
33
2 Installation
2.6.1 PickMaster
®
Twin Hardware connection illustration
2.6 Electrical connection
2.6.1 PickMaster ® Twin Hardware connection illustration
Example xx2100000349
34 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.6.2 Connecting cameras
2.6.2 Connecting cameras
Introduction to camera connections
The camera does not receive power voltage through the Ethernet cable. A separate connection provides power and I/O functions, this is the power/trig/strobe cable.
We recommend using an external power supply for the Gigabit Ethernet cameras.
This way, they will receive power regardless if the robot controller is turned on or not. If the camera is supplied with power directly from the robot controller it will shut down when the controller is turned off. Runtime can not reconnect to a camera that has been shut down and restarted. This means that if Runtime is running when a controller that serves as a camera power supply is shut down, Runtime must be restarted after the controller has been switched on again. This problem is avoided by using an external power supply.
A 4-port NIC board in the options must be used for the Gigabit Ethernet cameras.
And the cameras cannot use the same network card with the controller. Or the pictures will be affected.
The jumbo packet function of the network card is to be turned on when using with the camera.
The schematics of how the trigger strobe and power wires from the camera must be connected to the robot controller I/O board can be seen in the circuit diagrams, see Circuit diagram - PickMaster Twin , 3HAC024480-020 . Detailed information about avoiding EMI/ESD problems is described in
Avoid_EMI_ESD_in_camera_installations , see
Note
All safety information for working with the controller is described in the product manual for the controller.
Prerequisites
Make sure all power is switched off before connecting cameras.
Validated cameras
The following cameras are supported for the PickMaster PowerPac:
• acA1440 - 73gc
• scA1300 - 32gc
• scA1390 - 17gm
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
35
2 Installation
2.6.2 Connecting cameras
Continued
CAUTION
Personal injury hazard and risk of damage to camera in case of short circuits.
Short circuits may cause an extreme rise in temperature of the camera's housing.
This may damage the camera and may also lead to person injuries, for example, burns. In the worst case, the overheating may cause a fire.
In order to prevent that, limit the current flowing through each individual wire during a short circuit. The maximum current allowed is 2 A. Use a fuse or use a limited power supply.
Connecting the cameras
Use this procedure to connect the cameras.
1 Connect the Ethernet cable with screw connector to the camera.
2 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the PC or the switch (if used).
3 If a switch is used, connect the switch to the PC.
4 Connect the power wires of the power/trig/strobe cable to the external power supply accordingly.
In case no external power supply is used, connect to the controller.
5 Connect the trig/strobe wires of the power/trig/strobe cable to the robot controller.
Note
If Runtime is shut down and restarted quickly, and with several Gigabit Ethernet cameras, the Gigabit Ethernet performance driver may not be loaded properly for some cameras. The symptom is that the camera for which the driver is not loaded may occasionally fail to acquire an image, if the system is stressed. This can be avoided by waiting for 15 seconds between shutting down and restarting.
Related information
Circuit diagram - PickMaster Twin , 3HAC024480-020 .
36 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.6.3 Connecting I/O signals
2.6.3 Connecting I/O signals
Introduction to I/O connections
The Runtime concept consists of a number of I/O components that need to be connected physically.
Robot controller I/O board
At least one standard DI/DO board is required. Encoder boards are needed for conveyor tracking.
The encoder boards are delivered with a standard address that can differ from the
I/O configuration. This address can be changed.
For further information about how to read the encoder board address, see the product manual for the controller, see
.
Prerequisites
Make sure all power has been switched off.
Connecting the I/O signals
Use this procedure to connect the I/O signals.
1 If conveyors are used, connect each conveyor controller to the standard
DI/DO board for control from Runtime.
The drawings in Circuit diagram - PickMaster Twin , 3HAC024480-020 , uses
ACS 301-1P6-3 as conveyor controller, but other conveyor controllers can be used. The same applies to the encoder used, a Lenord-Bauer Gel
260-V-02500A001.
2 Connect the trig/strobe wires of the power/trig/strobe cables from the cameras to the robot controller.
3 Connect the I/O cables from any external tool signals to the robot controller.
4 Connect the I/O cables for other external devices, such as sensors to the robot controller.
5 Connect the encoders, see Application manual - Conveyor tracking .
I/O connections
The trigger strobe loop enables very precise synchronization between the robot controller and the image acquired. The I/O port of the Gigabit Ethernet camera closes this loop.
To be able to use more than one connection in input number 9 (StartSig) on the encoder board we recommend using diodes, for example HER105/Taw diode 1A
400V DO41 (the diodes are not supported by ABB). This will eliminate any possibilities of reverse currents.
When connecting a camera to multiple robot controllers it is important to consider how the system should work if one of the controllers is turned off. We recommend using an external 24V power supply to power the cameras. This way the cameras will have both power and I/O regardless if the controllers are turned off.
Continues on next page
37 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.6.3 Connecting I/O signals
Continued
Related information
Circuit diagram - PickMaster Twin , 3HAC024480-020
Predefined I/O signals on page 177 .
38 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.6.4 Configuring networks
2.6.4 Configuring networks
Introduction to the controller network
The PickMaster PowerPac and the robot controller communicate through Ethernet.
If you have problems in connecting to the network, contact the local network administrator.
Note
The PickMaster PowerPac must be conntected to the LAN port on the controller.
Do not use the service port.
Configuring the controller network
If a new local area network (LAN) is created specifically for PickMaster PowerPac the following settings can be used.
• Use static IP numbering with different addresses for both the computer and the robot controller.
• IP addresses: 192.168.1.X (where X is between 1 and 253).
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Gateway: 192.168.1.254
• DNS: N/A.
• Wins: N/A.
Note
The robot controller has a service Ethernet card configured with an IP address
(192.168.125.1). Therefore, the same subnet (192.168.125.X) must not be used for the standard LAN Ethernet card.
For more information, see the Windows documentation and the product manual for the robot controller to set up the IP configuration.
Note
It's not allowed to use any of the following IP addresses which are allocated for other functions:
• 192.168.127.0 - 255
The IP address cannot be on a subnet which overlaps with any of the above reserved IP addresses. If a subnet mask in the class B range has to be used, then a private address of class B must be used to avoid any overlapping. Contact your local network administrator regarding network overlapping.
See the section Communication in Technical reference manual - System parameters .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
39
2 Installation
2.6.4 Configuring networks
Continued
Prerequisites for vision networks
The vision network settings must be configured similar to the robot controller network settings.
Use a separate network for the vision system, that is controllers and cameras cannot be connected to the same network port on the PC.
To use more cameras than the number of available Ethernet ports on the PC, use one or two additional GigE cards.
The maximum number of cameras that can used with one PC is 10. Distribute them evenly on the dedicated vision network ports on the PC. Use cables with fastening screws between GigE card and camera. See example below of camera network topologies.
Cameras
Multi touch operation panel
Cell/Line
PLC
GigE
NIC board
Win10 IoT
PickMaster RT
Operator
Zenon
Conveyors
Modbus
Profinet
…
PCIE Encoders
CTM
Win10
PowerPac
RobotStudio
Ethernet
Robots & Robot Controllers xx1900001746
Note
Changes made to the camera settings outside Runtime will not be applied until
Runtime is restarted. This means that if a camera is restarted (power on/off) or a camera’s IP address is changed, thenRuntimer must be restarted to function properly. Therefore, Runtime and the Ethernet camera tool program should not be run simultaneously, to avoid unpredictable behavior. Instead, shut down
Runtime before making changes, then start Runtime after changes are saved.
Configuring the vision network
Use this procedure to configure the vision network.
1 Assign each camera with its own IP-address. The same rules apply as for other Ethernet networks, that is each camera and vision network card must have a unique IP address, and be located on the same subnet. The communication with cameras and controllers should be separated on different subnets. See
Example of suitable network architecture on page 41 .
2 Configure the IP addresses for the cameras using Cognex's Ethernet camera tool (available on the Windows Start menu in the Runtime folder). It can be used to set IP addresses of both cameras and network interface cards.
3 When all cameras are configured, install the Performance Driver for Gigabit
Ethernet vision for each port, see steps 4-6.
Continues on next page
40 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.6.4 Configuring networks
Continued
4 In the Ethernet Camera Tool , select one of the vision network ports in the tree view and click Set Performance Driver . A warning about installing unsigned software will appear, click OK and neglect any Windows message asking to install new hardware.
5 Reboot the PC when the installation has finished.
6 Start Ethernet Camera Tool and verify that the driver has been successfully installed for each vision network port, in the Configure Performance Driver part. Repeat steps 4-6 for the next vision network port (if more than one port is used).
Note
Running the Ethernet Camera Tool and Runtime at the same time may result in unpredictable behavior. To avoid this, use only one of the programs at a time.
Note
Install Gigabit Ethernet Performance Driver . This provides fast and reliable camera communication, as well as decreased CPU load.
CAUTION
Running camera traffic and controller traffic on the same network can cause serious communication failure.
Configuring the Runtime network
If a new local area network (LAN) is created specifically for Runtime the following settings can be used.
• Use static IP numbering with different addresses for the PickMaster PowerPac and the robot controller.
• IP addresses: 192.168.1.X (where X is between 1 and 253).
• Select Connect to RRT , the Sign in window is displayed. How to connect to
RRT, see
Example of suitable network architecture
The following example provides a suitable network architecture.
• Use static IP numbering with different addresses for both the computer and the camera(s).
• IP addresses of Port #1 and the cameras connected to it: 192.168.101.X
(where X is between 1 and 253).
• IP addresses of Port #2 and the cameras connected to it: 192.168.102.X
(where X is between 1 and 253).
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Gateway: Not Needed.
• DNS: N/A.
• Wins: N/A.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
41
2 Installation
2.6.5 Setting up robot controller
2.6.5 Setting up robot controller
CAUTION
If robot movement can be initiated from an external control panel then an emergency stop must also be available.
RobotWare
PickMaster PowerPac supports IRC5 and OmniCore robot controller. RobotWare is installed on the robot controller. The option PickMaster Ready is required to run
Runtime.
Note
The PickMaster Twin 1.0 is for IRC5 controller.
The PickMaster Twin 1.1 is for OmniCore controller.
For more information see the product manual for the controller, see
System parameters
The number of conveyors must be specified in the system parameters. Some other parameters must also be defined, such as motion, process, and encoder I/O parameters for the conveyors.
System parameters can be changed using the FlexPendant or RobotStudio.
I/O signals
How to configure I/O signals and boards is described in the section
.
The predefined I/O signals are described in the section
Predefined I/O signals on page 177
.
Related information
Product manual for the controller, see
.
Technical reference manual - System parameters .
Six axes robot configuration on page 44
.
42 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation
2.6.6 Optional robot and process configuration
2.6.6 Optional robot and process configuration
Conveyor process modification
Fewer modifications can be done on the system parameters
Topic Process
The following parameter can be modified in the topic Process . It belongs to the type Conveyor systems .
Parameter maximum distance
Description
Defines the standard tracking distance of a conveyor work object before it is switched to a new work object. This is by default set to 20000mm. The work object switch is done automatically and fast but may steal some process time for a high speed picking application. Increasing the value may improve the cycle time slightly.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
43
2 Installation
2.6.7 Six axes robot configuration
2.6.7 Six axes robot configuration
Modifications for six axes robots
When using PickMaster with a six axes robot, some modifications must be done in the system parameters to optimize the robot motion with the conveyor tracking process.
Topic Process
The following three parameters can be modified in the topic Process . They belong to the type Conveyor systems .
Parameter
Start ramp
Stop ramp
Adjustment speed
Description
This is the correction start filter ramp that is used when connecting to a moving conveyor. This is by default set to 5 (steps).
Tune this parameter if higher accuracy is needed. A lower value gives better accuracy but the manipulator may jerk when connecting to the moving object.
This is the correction stop filter ramp that is used when disconnecting from a moving conveyor. This is by default set to ten (steps).
Tune this parameter to eliminate manipulator jerks when leaving the moving object. A lower value gives better accuracy when leaving the conveyor.
The speed (in mm/s) at which the robot should catch up to the conveyor. The general recommended value is 130% of the conveyor speed. As minimum, the value should be more than 100% with some margin. If the robots speed is very fast compared to the conveyor speed, a further increase of the value is often necessary. If the value is set too low, robot movements may become jerky or the conveyor tracking accuracy may become reduced. On the other hand, if the value is set too high, the drive system may become overloaded, causing motion supervision errors. Generally, the maximum recommended value is 200%. For IRB360 in applications with high robot speed, the maximum recommended value is 500%.
44 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.1 Start page
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.1 Start page
Overview
This chapter describes about the start page of the PickMaster PowerPac.
xx1800001744
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
45
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.2 Main window
3.2 Main window
Overview
This chapter describes about the user interface of the PickMaster PowerPac. The following figure and table provides information regarding the major elements in the user interface.
xx1800001382
1
Item
Ribbon tab
2 Tree view browser
3
4
Station view
Status view
Description
Contains the general functions for PickMaster PowerPac.
When creating a new solution, the work flow is usually from left to right. For more details, see the section
Organizes the programmable objects (for example, robots, sensors, and conveyors) of the picking application in a tree structure. It is separated into line and job tabs. For more details, see the section
.
Realistic 3D display of the picking application. The objects in the station view are highlighted when selected or edited using the tree view browser.
Shows the status of the controller and system at present.
46 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.3.1 Introduction
3.3 Ribbon tab
3.3.1 Introduction
Overview
The PickMaster PowerPac ribbon contains elements arranged in various groups.
The following figures and tables provide more information regarding the elements in the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon.
Following are the objects and configurations saved in the ribbon tab.
xx1800001171
File xx1800001384
Button Description
Allows you to back to the main window.
xx1900000571
New
Open
Save
Allows you to create a new empty solution.
Recent allows you to open the last solution which has been opened on this computer.
Local folder allows you to open other solutions or any solutions saved in your local folder.
Allows you to save the changes for the solution at present.
Note
If the solution will be used in the PickMaster PowerPac, it must have been connected to a real controller with the same configuration on PickMaster PowerPac.
Continues on next page
47 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.3.1 Introduction
Continued
Button
Save as
Close
Share
Options
Description
Allows you to save your present solution as a new solution in your local folder.
Note
If the solution will be used in the PickMaster PowerPac, it must have been connected to a real controller with the same configuration on PickMaster PowerPac.
Allows you to close your present solution.
Pack&GO allows you to pack all the information of current solution, controller used in the solution and 3D models into a file so that it makes sharing files between users.
UnPack&GO allows you to unpack the sharing files which contains all the information of a solution, controller used in the solution and 3D models.
Pack As Template allows you to pack your present solution as a template in your local folder.
Language allows you to choose the applied language.
License allows you to choose a license type.
Disable licensing check box allows you to disable the license function.
Verify License icon allows you to verify your license is valid or not.
Apply icon allows you to apply the change of the license to your
PickMaster PowerPac.
LAYOUT
About
Exit xx1800001385
Allows you to get the basic version information.
Allows you to close and exit the PickMaster PowerPac.
xx1800001171
Continues on next page
48 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
RECIPE
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.3.1 Introduction
Continued
Button
Cell Template
Controller
Gripper
Conveyor
Sensor
I/O Sensor
Description
Allows you to create a solution from the predefined templates.
More details about creating a controller is available in the section
Opening a solution from the Template on page 72 .
Allows you to add a controller with a robot system in the station view.
More details about creating a controller is available in the section
.
Allows you to create a gripper.
More details about creating a gripper is available in the section
.
Allows you to create a conveyor.
More details about creating a conveyor is available in the section
.
Allows you to create a sensor.
More details about creating a sensor is available in the section
.
Allows you to create an I/O sensor.
More details about creating an I/O sensor is available in the section
Adding an I/O sensor on page 90
.
Workarea Allows you to create a work area.
More details about creating a work area is available in the section
.
Circular Conveyor Workarea
Allows you to create a circular conveyor work area.
More details about creating a circular conveyor work area is available in the section
Adding a circular conveyor work area on page 96
.
Indexed Workarea Allows you to create an indexed work area.
More details about creating an indexed work area is available in the section
Adding a indexed work area on page 98 .
xx1800001172
Button
Items
Container
Description
Allows you to create items.
More details about creating an item is available in the section
Allows you to create containers.
More details about creating an container is available in the section
.
Continues on next page
49 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.3.1 Introduction
Continued
Button
Recipe
Flow
Description
Allows you to create a recipe.
More details about creating a recipe is available in the section
Allows you to define how the items and containers are to be generated in the simulation.
More details about creating a flow is available in the section
.
SIMULATION
PRODUCTION xx1800001173
Button
Calibration
Start
Stop
Reset
Description
Allows you to calibrate the created solution.
More details about calibrating the created solution. is available in the section
.
Allows you start or pause a simulation.
Allows you stop the simulation.
Allows you reset the station view from objects temporarily created in the previously run simulation.
xx1800001174
Button
Production
Description
Allows you start a production.
More details about how to run the production is available in the section
and
.
Continues on next page
50 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.3.1 Introduction
Continued
LOG
RUNTIME xx1800001175
Button
Viewer
Save
Description
Allows you to open the log viewer.
Allows you to save the log as csv file to your local folder.
xx1800001176
Button
Connect to RRT
Change password
Disconnect RRT
User Manager
Description
Allows you to connect to the real Runtime.
Allows you to change your password.
Allows you to disconnect from the real Runtime.
Allows you to create or delete the users, and add groups for different users.
User Manager
Introduction
PickMaster PowerPac manages different users and groups. Each user has a use group and each use group is associated with an ability. Users, groups, and abilities are all defined in auth.conf
. This file is located in the Pickmaster Runtime installation folder under RIS\RIS2\auth\ .
The groups "administrator", "technicist"and "operator" are provided. The administrator has the ability to “manage” and the operator has the ability to
“operate”.
A default user and password have been created for each group.
Administrator Username: admin with Password: password
Technicist Username: superuser with Password: ABB1998
Continues on next page
51 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.3.1 Introduction
Continued
Operator Username: operator with Password: password
Note
The default user admin cannot be deleted.
To improve the safety of the default user account, the user can change the password.
Note
The Username and Password are case sensitive.
Adding a new user to a group is done in two steps, that is, by creating a user and then assigning it to a group.
xx1900000565
Continues on next page
52 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.3.1 Introduction
Continued
Creating a user
To create a user:
1 Click File and select User Manager .
xx1900000564
The User Manager window is displayed.
xx1900000565
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
53
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.3.1 Introduction
Continued
2 In the Users section, click Add .
xx1900000566
The Add user window is displayed.
xx1900000567
Continues on next page
54
3 Type a name for the new user in the User Name field.
4 Type a password in the Password field.
5 Retype the password in the Confirm Password field.
6 Select the role to assign to the user in the Role list.
7 Click OK .
The user is created and added to the user list with the selected role assigned.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.3.1 Introduction
Continued
Deleting a user
Note
Restart the Runtime to activate a new added user.
To delete a user:
1 Click File and select User Manager .
The User Manager window is displayed.
2 Select the user that you want to delete from the Users list.
3 Cick Delete user .
A confirmation window to delete the selected user is displayed.
xx1900000672
4 Click Yes .
The selected user is deleted and removed from the Users list.
Note
Restart the Runtime to deactivate the deleted user.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
55
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
3.4 Tree view browser
3.4.1 Cell
Overview
The tree view browser in the PickMaster PowerPac consists of a Cell tab.
The Cell tab displays the RunTime and the application hardware objects such as robots, cameras, conveyors, and recipes.
Following are the objects and configurations saved in the Cell tab.
xx1800001383
• RunTime
• Controllers
• Grippers
• Conveyors
• Sensors
• Items
• Containers
Continues on next page
56 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
RunTime
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
• Recipes
Right-click on RunTime and switch between the RunTime and Virtual RunTime .
Click Start Local RRT to start the RunTime on the computer. Select Connect to
RRT , the Sign in window is displayed. The following figure and table provide more details about the window.
xx1800001387 xx1800001388
IP Address
Runtime Account
UserName
Description
Allows you to locate the IP address of the Runtime computer.
Allows you to enter the user name of your account in the Runtime.
Password Allows you to enter the password of your account in the Runtime.
Enter your PC admin user name and password
UserName
Password
Allows you to enter the user name of the administrator account for the computer which the Runtime is installed.
Allows you to enter the password of the administrator account for the computer which the Runtime is installed.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
57
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
Controller
Managing controller
Right-click on a Controller icon. The following window is displayed.
xx1800001389
Edit controller
Delete
Rename
Description
Allows you to change the settings for the selected controller.
When you right-click on a controller and select Edit controller , the
Edit controller window is displayed. See the following section for more details about managing a selected controller.
Allows you to delete the selected controller.
Allows you to change the name of the selected controller.
The following figure and table provides details about the Edit controller window.
xx1800001390
Description
Controller Name Displays the name of the selected controller.
System Name
IP Address
Version
Displays the name of the system.
Displays the IP address of the selected controller.
Displays the version of the system.
Continues on next page
58 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
Managing robot
Description
System ID Displays the ID of the system.
Start Virtual controller
The Start Virtual controller icon allows you to start the selected virtual controller.
Select Real controller
The Select Real controller icon allows you to select a real controller when running production.
Right-click on a Robot icon. The following window is displayed
Set pose xx1800001391
Jump Home
Set Position
Examine
Rename
Description
Allows you to move the robot to the home position.
Allows you a set a position for the selected robot.
When you right-click on a robot and select Set Position , the Set
Robot Pose window is displayed. See the following section for more details about managing the position of a selected robot.
Allows you to examine the robot in the Station view.
Allows you to change the name of the selected robot.
The following figure and table provides details about the Set Pose configuration window.
xx1800001392
Reference
Position X,Y,Z (mm)
Orientation (deg)
Description
Allows you to select a coordinate system.
Allows you to set a new position for the selected robot.
Allows you to set a new orientation for the selected robot.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
59
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
Grippers
Managing grippers
Right-click on a Gripper icon. The following window is displayed.
xx1800001393
Settings
Delete
Rename
Examine
Description
Allows you to manage the settings of the selected gripper.
When you select Setting , the Robot_Gripper Setting window is displayed. More details about managing a selected gripper is available in the section
.
Allows you to delete the selected gripper.
Allows you to change the name of the selected gripper.
Allows you to examine the selected gripper in the Station view.
Conveyor
Managing conveyor
Right-click on a Conveyor icon. The following window is displayed.
xx1800001394
Continues on next page
60 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
Setting
Delete
Rename
Hotspots...
Description
Allows you to manage the settings of the selected conveyor.
When you select Setting , the Conveyor Setting window is displayed.
More details about managing a selected conveyor is available in the section
Allows you to delete the selected conveyor.
Allows you to change the name of the selected conveyor.
Allows you to manage the hotspots.
When you select Hotspots...
, the Set Conveyor hotspots window is displayed. See the following section for more details about the
Set Conveyor hotspots window.
Note
The hotspot is a saved location on the conveyor. A hotspot is used to define where on the conveyor the flow shall be generated. There is always a default hotspot, Hotspot0, located at the beginning of the conveyor. If the flow appears at a wrong location, modify the hotspot location to adjust it.
Examine Allows you to examine the selected conveyor in the Station view.
The following figure and table provides details about the Set Conveyor hotspots window.
xx1800001395
Hotspots list
Position X Y Z
Description
Displays the available hotspots.
Allows you define the position of the hotspot.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
61
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
Manage work area
Right-click on a Conveyor WA icon. The following window is displayed.
xx1800001396
Setting
Delete
Rename
Description
Allows you to manage the settings of the selected work area.
When you right-click on a conveyor work area and select Setting , the
Conveyor WA Setting window is displayed. More details about managing a conveyor work area is available in the section
.
When you right-click on a circular conveyor work area and select Settings , the Circular Conveyor WA Setting window is displayed. More details about managing an indexed work area is available in the section
Adding a indexed work area on page 98 .
When you right-click on an indexed work area and select Settings , the
Indexed WA Setting window is displayed. More details about managing an indexed work area is available in the section
Adding a indexed work area on page 98 .
Allows you to delete the selected conveyor work area.
Allows you to change the name of the selected conveyor work area.
Continues on next page
62 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
Sensors
Managing camera
Right-click on a Camera icon. The following window is displayed.
xx1800001397
Configuration
Calibration
Description
Allows you to configure the selected camera.
When you right-click on a camera and select Configuration , the
Camera Configuration window is displayed. More details about managing a camera is available in the section
Configuring camera on page 181 .
Allows you to calibrate the selected camera.
When you right-click on a camera and select Calibration , the Camera
Calibration window is displayed. More details about managing a camera is available in the section
Calibrating camera on page 234
.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
63
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
Live Video
Description
Allows you to have a view of the scene of the real camera.
xx1900000562
When you started the live video, you can stop it by click the Stop
Video after right click on the sensor.
Setting
Delete
Rename
Examine xx1900000684
Allows you to manage the settings of the selected camera.
When you right-click on a camera and select Setting , the Camera
Setting window is displayed. More details about managing a camera is available in the section
Allows you to delete the selected camera.
Allows you to change the name of the selected camera.
Allows you to examine the selected camera in the Station view.
Continues on next page
64 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
Managing I/O sensor
Right-click on an I/O Sensor icon. The following window is displayed.
xx1800001398
Setting
Delete
Rename
Examine
Description
Allows you to manage the settings of the selected I/O senor.
When you right-click on an I/O sensor and select Setting , the I/O Sensor
Setting window is displayed. More details about managing an I/O sensor is available in the section
Adding an I/O sensor on page 90 .
Allows you to delete the selected I/O sensor.
Allows you to change the name of the selected I/O sensor.
Allows you to examine the selected I/O sensor in the Station view.
Items
Managing item
Right-click on an item icon. The following window is displayed.
xx1800001399
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
65
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
Setting
Delete
Rename
Description
Allows you to manage the settings of the selected item.
When you select Setting , the Item Setting window is displayed.
More details about managing a selected conveyor is available in the section
Allows you to delete the selected item.
Allows you to change the name of the selected item.
Containers
Managing container
Right-click on a Container icon. The following window is displayed.
xx1800001400
Setting
Delete
Rename
Description
Allows you to manage the settings of the selected conveyor.
When you select Setting , the Container Setting window is displayed.
More details about managing a selected container is available in the section
.
Allows you to delete the selected container.
Allows you to change the name of the selected container.
Continues on next page
66 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.4.1 Cell
Continued
Recipes
Managing recipe
Right-click on a Recipe icon. The following window is displayed.
xx1800001409
Setting
Delete
Copy
Rename
Description
Allows you to manage the settings of the selected recipe.
When you select Setting , the Recipe Setting window is displayed.
More details about managing a selected recipe is available in the section
Allows you to delete the selected recipe.
Allows you to copy the selected recipe.
Allows you to change the name of the selected recipe.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
67
3 Navigating PickMaster PowerPac
3.5 Status view
3.5 Status view
Status
When the system starts, the status of the controller and the Runtime will show up on the right top corner as the illustration.
xx1800001410
Controllers
Controller
Description Note
Red : There is at least one controller stopped.
Green : All controllers are started and autorunning.
Yellow : There is at least one controller started and under manual controlling or just connected.
Grey : No controller is added in the existing solution.
xx1800001745
Note
The Red has the highest priority.
Red : Controller is stopped
Green : Controller is started and auto-running.
Yellow : Controller is started and under manual controlling or just connected.
Click on the Controllers button , the detailed status for each controller will show up.
Runtime
VRT
RRT
English
Grey : No solution is opened.
Red : The connection to the virtual Runtime fails.
Green : The connection to the virtual Runtime successes.
Yellow : The connection to the virtual Runtime is progressing.
Red : The connection to the real Runtime fails.
Green :The connection to the real Runtime successes.
Yellow : The connection to the real Runtime is progressing.
The using language of the system.
Allows you to open the PickMaster PowerPac application manual.
xx1800001746 xx2000000307
68 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.1 Overview
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.1 Overview
Overview
Working with PickMaster PowerPac in virtual Runtime is to fulfill the simulation function in a visual status.
Working with PickMaster PowerPac in real Runtime is to fulfill the emulation and production function in real stations with real robots and controllers.
Simulation is a previous debugging procedure to save cost and time when creating real stations.
The following is a recommended flow for working with PickMaster PowerPac. After you complete the workflow, you can perform these task in any order.
Note
The controller (contains at least one robot system) should be set up in
RobotStudio environment before starting PickMaster PowerPac, as the PickMaster
PowerPac provides only a method for creating paths but not functions for creating a virtual controller.
Note
If any firewall or antivirus software is installed, add pickmasteru.exe
, sshd.exe
, and visionclient. exe to the white list.
Otherwise the PickMaster PowerPac cannot connect Runtime and the vision function cannot work normally.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
69
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.1 Overview
Continued
Workflow for PickMaster PowerPac
Use this procedure to work with PickMaster PowerPac:
VRT 1
2
3
4
5
6
Task
Create an empty solution.
Add a controller.
Add a gripper.
Add a conveyor.
Add a sensor.
Add a work area.
Description
For detailed information, see
Creating Solution on page 71 .
For detailed information, see
.
For detailed information, see
For detailed information, see
For detailed information, see
For detailed information, see
7
8
9
10
11
16 Calibrate the circular conveyors.
17 Calibrate the indexed work area.
18 Verify the calibrations.
19
20
21
Add an items.
Add a container.
Add a recipe.
Calibrate the solution.
Do simulation
Calibrate the cameras.
Add a vision model.
Start the production.
For detailed information, see
.
For detailed information, see
.
For detailed information, see
.
For detailed information, see
.
For detailed information, see
.
RRT 12
13
Switch to real Runtime
Configure the cameras.
.
For detailed information, see
.
For detailed information, see
Configuring camera on page 181 .
14 Calibrate the robots.
For detailed information, see
.
15 Calibrate the linear conveyors.
For detailed information, see
Calibrating linear conveyor on page 186 .
For detailed information, see
For detailed information, see
.
For detailed information, see
.
For detailed information, see
Calibrating camera on page 234 .
For detailed information, see
Adding vision model on page 245 .
For detailed information, see
Starting production on page 283 .
70 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.1 Creating Solution
4.2 Setting up Solution and Recipe in virtual Runtime (VRT)
4.2.1 Creating Solution
Creating an empty solution
Use this procedure to create an empty solution:
1 Run the PickMaster PowerPac as administrator.
The PickMaster PowerPac opens.
xx1800000839
2 Click New .
xx1800000840
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
71
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.1 Creating Solution
Continued
An empty solution is created.
xx1800000841
Opening a solution from the Template
Open template from LAYOUT
You can also open a solution from the Cell Template when a solution is opened.
xx1800001386
Item
Parallel Conveyors
Vertical Conveyors
Circular Conveyors
User defined
Description
Parallel Templates allows you to choose one predefined parallel template.
Vertical Conveyors allows you to chose one predefined vertical template.
Circular Conveyors allows you to choose one predefined circular template.
User defined allows you to choose one template which saved by the users in the local computer folder.
1 On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Layout .
xx1800001171
Continues on next page
72 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.1 Creating Solution
Continued
2 On the ribbon-tab, click Cell Template .
xx1800001386
3 Click to choose one template from the popup list according to your requirements.
The template is opening. A Please wait window shows up.
The main window for the chosen template shows up.
Opening a recent solution
If you have opened a solution before, use this procedure to open a recent solution:
1 Run the PickMaster PowerPac as administrator.
The PickMaster PowerPac opens.
xx1800000839
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
73
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.1 Creating Solution
Continued
2 Click to select the Open .
xx1800001460
3 Click to choose one recent file according to your requirements.
The chosen recent file is opening. A Please wait window shows up.
The main window for the chosen recent file shows up.
You can also open a recent file from the Open when a solution is opened.
xx1800001461
74 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.2 Adding Controller
4.2.2 Adding Controller
Overview
This section describes how to add and modify a controller.
xx1900000572
Create a controller
For more information on how to create a controller, refer to Operating manual - RobotStudio .
WARNING
When creating an OmniCore controller, the Remote Start and Stop in Auto must be selected. Or the PickMaster PowerPac CANNOT run simulation or production.
xx2100000051
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
75
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.2 Adding Controller
Continued
Adding a controller
The Add Existing System dialog box opens as illustrated below.
xx1800000846
Note
Only the Controller that is created before this page is opened can be found in the System Found .
If a new Controller is created, the user need to refresh the Add Existing System dialog box.
Item
System Pool
Description
System Pool specify the location and folder of your PC where the required controller systems are stored.
Add icon allows you to choose the folder system from the list that you pre-defined in the RobotStudio.
Remove icon allows you to remove the folder system from the list that you pre-defined in the RobotStudio
Allows you to create or work with a robot system.
Manage System
System Found
Reset system(I-start)
Import new libraries
Lists the systems found in the selected system folder.
The controller will restart when this is selected.
Add the predefined robot to the PickMaster PowerPac.
Use existing station libraries
Open an existed system from the RobotStudio .
Continues on next page
76 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Procedure
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.2 Adding Controller
Continued
Item
Sync RAPID program to station
Description
Sync the application program to the solution.
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Layout .
Use this procedure to add a controller:
Note
You can only add the existed controller in the system to the solution. For more information about create controller, see
Create a controller on page 75
.
Note
The controller must be created before this step.
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Controller .
xx1800000845
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
77
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.2 Adding Controller
Continued
The Add Existing System dialog box is opened.
xx1800000846
2 To add a folder to the System Pool list, click Add and then browse and select the folder to be added. To remove a folder from the list, click Remove .
Continues on next page
78 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.2 Adding Controller
Continued
3 The Systems Found table lists the virtual controller systems found in the selected system folder. Click a system to select it for the new solution.
xx1800000847
4 Select the required check boxes in Options .
Note
A virtual controller system that has been modified using the Modify System function of the System Builder must be restarted with the Reset System option for the changes to take effect.
5 In the dialog box, click OK to add the selected controller to the solution.
The selected controller is added into the solution. The new added controller shows up in the Cell window Controller list.
xx1800000848
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
79
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.2 Adding Controller
Continued
6 In the Set Robot1 Pose window, enter numbers in the Position X Y Z (mm) text box and Orientation (deg) text box according to your requirements.
xx1800000849
7 Click OK .
Note
The pose can be adjusted when the other parts are added.
Right click on the Robot1 in the Cell window Controller list.
80 xx1800000850
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.3 Adding Gripper
4.2.3 Adding Gripper
Overview
This section describes how to add a gripper.
xx1900000573
Adding a gripper
The Gripper window opens as illustrated below.
xx1800000854
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
81
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.3 Adding Gripper
Continued
Item
Add to library
Gripper Name
Controller
Available Robot
Reference Coordinate
Position XYZ(mm)
Orientation XYZ(deg)
Mass Setting
Activator Setting
Mass Setting
Use Default
Mass
Center of gravity
Inertia
Description
Allows you to import a pre-defined gripper from the library or upload an user defined gripper to the library.
Note
To upload an user defined gripper, click Add to library , browse to the local folder and select the *.rslib
file, the gripper will be added to the library automatically.
Type a name for the tool in the Name field.
Select a controller from the Controller list.
Select a robot from the Robot list.
Allows you to select the reference coordinate for the gripper.
Allows you to set the position of the gripper.
Allows you to set the orientation of the gripper.
For more details, see following section.
For more details, see following section.
Description
Use default setting for the mass setting.
Type the mass of the tool in the Mass (kg) field.
Type the coordinates of the center of gravity.
Type the values of the inertia in Inertia (kgm 2 ).
xx1900001416
Continues on next page
82 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Procedure
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.3 Adding Gripper
Continued
Activator Setting
Activator Using
Add icon
Delete icon
Rapid tooldata
TCP Position
TCP Orientation
Signal
Default Settings
Customized Settings
Description
Allows you to select the activator to be used.
Allows you to add a new activator.
Note
When you need to do multiple pick, you should add enough activators for each pick. For example, if you need to pick four items and then place them, you need to add another three activators besides the default one.
To do multiple pick, the Multiple-Pick rapid file in the installation package should be imported to the recipe for the required robots.
Allows you to delete a selected activator.
Select a RAPID tooldata from Tool data . The selected tooldata shall be used by the RAPID program when picking with this activator.
Note
The RAPID program needs to be updated if more than one activator is used. For more details see,
Example: Double pick single place on page 407 .
Type the coordinates of the tool center point. The tool center point defines the location on the tool where an item is attached.
Note
The coordinates are applied to the selected tooldata during the simulation.
Type the orientation of the tool center point. The TCP orientation defines the desired orientation of the tool while picking up an item. The orientation shall be specified as Euler XYZ angles
(degrees).
Note
The orientation is applied to the selected tooldata during the simulation.
Allows you to choose the setting of the signal.
Use default setting for the the signal.
Allows you to change the setting of the signal.
Use this procedure to add grippers:
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
83
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.3 Adding Gripper
Continued
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Layout .
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Gripper .
xx1800000852
The Gripper window opens.
xx1800000853
2 In the Gripper window, enter a name in the Gripper Name text box or use the default one.
3 In the Gripper window, use default for the Mass Setting and Activator
Setting .
4 Click OK .
84 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.4 Adding Conveyor
4.2.4 Adding Conveyor
Overview
This section describes how to add a conveyor.
xx1900000576
Adding a conveyor
The Conveyor window opens as illustrated below.
xx1800000857
Item
Conveyor Name
Conveyor Type
LWH Size(mm)
Description
The name of the new conveyor.
Make sure the name is unique in the current task.
Allows you to select the a liner conveyor or a circular conveyor.
Allows you to define the size of the conveyor.
Continues on next page
85 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.4 Adding Conveyor
Continued
Procedure
Item
Preview icon
Reference Coordinate
Position XYZ(mm)
Orientation XYZ(deg)
Conveyor Signal
Controller
Description
Click to preview the new conveyor.
Allows you to select the reference coordinate for the conveyor.
Allows you to set the position of the conveyor.
Allows you to set the orientation of the conveyor.
Allows you to choose the setting of the signal.
Allows you to choose the controller to be used.
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Layout .
Use this procedure to add conveyors:
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Conveyor .
xx1800000855
The Conveyor window opens.
xx1800000856
2 In the Conveyor window, enter a name in the Conveyor Name text box or use the default one.
3 In the Conveyor window, select a type as liner or circular in the Conveyor
Type drop-down list.
Continues on next page
86 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.4 Adding Conveyor
Continued
4 If you select a liner conveyor, in the Conveyor window, enter numbers in the
LWH Size(mm) text box to define the size of the conveyor according to your requirements.
xx1900000574
5 If you select a circular conveyor, in the Conveyor window, enter numbers in the RH Size(mm) text box to define the size of the conveyor according to your requirements.
xx1900000575
6 Click Preview , the conveyor preview appears in the station view. The conveyor position setting text box is activated.
7 In the Conveyor window, enter numbers in the Position X Y Z (mm) text box and Orientation (deg) text boxes to define the location of the conveyor according to your requirements.
8 In the Conveyor window, use default for the Conveyor Signal and Controller .
9 Click OK .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
87
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.5 Adding Sensor
4.2.5 Adding Sensor
Overview
This section describes how to add a sensor.
xx1900000577
Figure 4.1:
Adding a sensor
The Camera window opens as illustrated below.
xx1800001413
Item
Camera Name
Continues on next page
88
Description
The name of the new camera.
Make sure the name is unique in the current task.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Procedure
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.5 Adding Sensor
Continued
Item Description
Attached to Conveyor/Index
Allows you to choose the conveyor if the camera shall be attached to a conveyor.
Entry (mm) Type an entry limit for the visible area below the camera along a conveyor. A negative value is used if the visible area starts upstreams from the camera location.
Exit (mm)
Enable vision width
Left (mm)
Type an exit limit for the visible area below the camera along a conveyor. A positive value is used if the visible area ends downstreams from the camera location.
Select this to enable a width limitation of the visible area.
Type a limit value for the left side of the visible area. A negative value is used if the visible area ends on the left side of the camera location (from an upstream viewpoint).
Right (mm)
Reference Coordinate
Position XYZ(mm)
Orientation XYZ(deg)
Type a limit value for the right side of the visible area. A positive value is used if the visible area ends on the right side of the camera location (from an upstream viewpoint).
Allows you to select the reference coordinate for the camera.
Allows you to set the position of the camera.
Allows you to set the orientation of the camera.
Note
The visible area is not limited if the camera is used with an indexed work area .
Note
The camera will not detect any objects created or placed on the other conveyors or indexed work areas.
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Layout .
Use this procedure to add conveyors:
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Sensor .
xx1800001411
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
89
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.5 Adding Sensor
Continued
The Camera window opens.
xx1800001412
2 In the Camera window, enter a name in the Camera Name text box or use the default one.
3 In the Camera window, choose a conveyor in the Attached to Conveyor/Index box to define which conveyor the new camera is attached to according to your requirements.
4 In the Camera window, use default for the other settings.
5 Click OK .
Adding an I/O sensor
The I/O sensor window opens as illustrated below.
xx1800001416
Continues on next page
90 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Procedure
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.5 Adding Sensor
Continued
Item
I/O sensor Name
Description
The name of the new I/O sensor.
Make sure the name is unique in the current task.
I/O sensor Height
I/O sensor Length
The height of the new I/O sensor.
The length of the new I/O sensor.
Attached to Conveyor/Index
Allows you to choose the conveyor if the camera shall be attached to a conveyor.
Reference Coordinate
Position XYZ(mm)
Orientation XYZ(deg)
Allows you to select the reference coordinate for the I/O sensor.
Allows you to set the position for the I/O sensor.
Allows you to set the orientation of the I/O sensor.
Note
To function correctly, an I/O sensor must not be in contact with other stationary objects, for example, the conveyor.
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Layout .
Use this procedure to add conveyors:
1 On the ribbon-tab, click I/O sensor .
xx1800001414
The I/O sensor window opens.
xx1800001415
2 In the I/O sensor window, enter a name in the I/O sensor Name text box or use the default one.
Continues on next page
91 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.5 Adding Sensor
Continued
3 In the I/O sensor window, enter numbers in the I/O sensor Height text box to define the height of the I/O sensor according to your requirements or use default settings.
4 In the I/O sensor window, enter numbers in the I/O sensor Length text box to define the length of the I/O sensor according to your requirements or use default settings.
5 In the I/O sensor window, choose a conveyor in the Attached to
Conveyor/Index box to define which conveyor the new camera is attached to according to your requirements.
6 Click OK .
92 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.6 Adding work area
4.2.6 Adding work area
Overview
This section describes how to add a work area.
xx1900000578
Adding a work area
The conveyor work area is an area on the conveyor where the robot picks or places items. One conveyor board is required for each conveyor work area. A robot usually has only one conveyor work area on each related conveyor, but there is no restriction.
The Conveyor Workarea window opens as illustrated below.
xx1800001419
Description
Workarea Name Type a name for the conveyor work area.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
93
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.6 Adding work area
Continued
Controller
Robot
Description
Select a picking controller from the list.
Select a robot from the list.
Conveyor Board Select a conveyor board from the list.
Conveyor Select a conveyor from the list.
Workarea Order Indicates the upstream order of this work area among other work areas on this conveyor. For example, “2” indicates that this is the second most upstream work area on this conveyor.
Workarea Type
Selection Index
Signal Type
Select work area type from the available options.
• Pick : Select this if the work area is a picking area.
• Place : Select this if the work area is a placing area.
Select an index to specify the pick or place order in the RAPID program when using more than one pick work area and one place work area with the selected robot
Configure the signals. Use the Customized Settings options to manage the signals. For more information regarding Conveyor work area signals see the following section.
Select the Default Settings check box to use the default signal configuration.
Conveyor work area signals
Signal
Conveyor start/stop
Queue idle
Position available
Position generator
Trig
Strobe
Description
Digital output signal. This signal is used if an overflow shall be avoided by letting the conveyor movement be controlled by the work area. The signal goes high when the conveyor shall start moving and goes low when the conveyor shall stop to avoid an overflow.
Digital output signal. This signal is high when the queue for this work area is empty. The signal goes high when the last item is retrieved from the queue.
Digital output signal. This signal is high when there is one or more items between the enter and exit limits for the work area.
Digital input signal that tells that it is time to generate a new vision image or generate new predefined positions. This signal is ignored if a distance triggered conveyor is used.
If vision is used this digital output signal must be connected to the trigger input on the I/O port on the camera. If predefined positions are used this output signal must be connected directly to the start input on the conveyor encoder board. This is best done using the doManSyncX signal. If predefined positions are distributed only to this work area (For instance, Runtime with a single robot),the encoder signal cXSoftSyncSig can be used instead of doManSyncX , that is, without the need of connecting a signal to the start input of the encoder board.
This is the input signal name for the strobe signal and is the start signal for the encoder board for the conveyor. The signal name is set to cXNewObjStrobe . If vision is used the signal must be generated from the strobe output on the I/O port of the camera. When predefined positions are used, the strobe may be generated directly from the doManSyncX signal, which is directly connected to the start signal on the encoder board.
Continues on next page
94 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Procedure
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.6 Adding work area
Continued
Note
Using distance triggered Positions Source with DSQC2000, camera or predefined source, configure cxTrigVis as Trig signal. From RW6.10 and later, the Strobe signal is automatically configured and can therefore be omitted in the work area signal configuration.
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Layout .
Use this procedure to a work area:
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Workarea .
xx1800001417
The Conveyor Workarea window opens.
xx1800001418
2 In the Conveyor Workarea window, enter a name in the Workarea Name text box or use the default one.
3 Select the required work area type and configure the settings.
4 Click OK .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
95
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.6 Adding work area
Continued
Adding a circular conveyor work area
The conveyor work area is an area on the conveyor where the robot picks or places items. One conveyor board is required for each conveyor work area. A robot usually has only one conveyor work area on each related conveyor, but there is no restriction.
The Circular Conveyor Workarea window opens as illustrated below.
xx1800001425
Description
Workarea Name Type a name for the conveyor work area.
Controller
Robot
Select a picking controller from the list.
Select a robot from the list.
Conveyor Board Select a conveyor board from the list.
Conveyor Select a conveyor from the list.
Workarea Order Indicates the upstream order of this work area among other work areas on this conveyor. For example, “2” indicates that this is the second most upstream work area on this conveyor.
Workarea Type
Selection Index
Signal Type
Select work area type from the available options.
• Pick : Select this if the work area is a picking area.
• Place : Select this if the work area is a placing area.
Select an index to specify the pick or place order in the RAPID program when using more than one pick work area and one place work area with the selected robot
Configure the signals. Use the Customized Settings options to manage the signals. For more information regarding Conveyor work area signals see the following section.
Select the Default Settings check box to use the default signal configuration.
Continues on next page
96 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.6 Adding work area
Continued
Conveyor work area signals
Procedure
Signal
Conveyor start/stop
Queue idle
Position available
Position generator
Trig
Strobe
Description
Digital output signal. This signal is used if an overflow shall be avoided by letting the conveyor movement be controlled by the work area. The signal goes high when the conveyor shall start moving and goes low when the conveyor shall stop to avoid an overflow.
Digital output signal. This signal is high when the queue for this work area is empty. The signal goes high when the last item is retrieved from the queue.
Digital output signal. This signal is high when there is one or more items between the enter and exit limits for the work area.
Digital input signal that tells that it is time to generate a new vision image or generate new predefined positions. This signal is ignored if a distance triggered conveyor is used.
If vision is used this digital output signal must be connected to the trigger input on the I/O port on the camera. If predefined positions are used this output signal must be connected directly to the start input on the conveyor encoder board. This is best done using the doManSyncX signal. If predefined positions are distributed only to this work area (For instance, Runtime with a single robot),the encoder signal cXSoftSyncSig can be used instead of doManSyncX , that is, without the need of connecting a signal to the start input of the encoder board.
This is the input signal name for the strobe signal and is the start signal for the encoder board for the conveyor. The signal name is set to cXNewObjStrobe . If vision is used the signal must be generated from the strobe output on the I/O port of the camera. When predefined positions are used, the strobe may be generated directly from the doManSyncX signal, which is directly connected to the start signal on the encoder board.
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Layout .
Use this procedure to a work area:
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Circular Conveyor Workarea .
xx1800001420
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
97
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.6 Adding work area
Continued
The Conveyor window opens.
xx1800001424
2 In the Circular Conveyor Workarea window, enter a name in the Workarea
Name text box or use the default one.
3 Select the required work area type and configure the settings.
4 Click OK .
Adding a indexed work area
An indexed work area is a fixed area where a robot picks or places items without conveyor tracking.
The Indexed Workarea window opens as illustrated below.
xx1800001428
Workarea Name
Continues on next page
98
Description
Type a name for the indexed work area.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.6 Adding work area
Continued
Controller
Robot
Workarea Type
Work object
Description
Select a controller from the list.
Select a robot from the list.
Select work area type from the available options.
• Pick : Select this if the indexed work area is a picking area.
• Place : Select this if the indexed work area is a placing area.
Select a RAPID work object data ( wobjdata
). The associated wobjdata is automatically used with the indexed work area.
Note
No work object calibration is needed. The selected wobjdata is automatically updated when a simulation is started.
Selection Index Select an index to specify the pick or place order in the RAPID program when using more than one pick work area and one place work area with the selected robot.
Reference Coordinate Allows you to select the reference coordinate for the indexed work area.
Position XYZ(mm)
Orientation XYZ(deg)
Signal Type
Allows you to set the position for the indexed work area.
Allows you to set the orientation of the indexed work area.
Configure the signals. Use the Customized Settings options to manage the signals. For more information regarding indexed work area signals see the following section.
Select the Default Settings check box to use the default signal configuration.
Indexed work area signals
Signal
Robot execution
Queue idle
Description
This optional digital input I/O signal is used to indicate that it is allowed for the robot to execute an item target in the RAPID program. Execution starts when the signal is high and stops when the signal goes low. If the signal goes low, all remaining items in the currently executing scene is dropped, so when the signal goes high again, the item targets for the next scene is executed. The signal must also go low after one scene is finished and then go high again to start executing item targets for the next scene.
Digital output signal. This signal is high when the queue for this work area is empty. The signal goes high when the last item is retrieved from the queue.
Position available
Position generator
Note
If the robot needs to repeat the motion, this signal should be the same with the signal in Strobe .
This output signal is high when there are one or more items when the Robot execution signal is high for the work area. If no Robot Execution signal is used the Position Available signal will go high as soon as there are any items in the queue.
Digital input signal that tells that it is time to generate a new vision image or generate new predefined positions. This signal is ignored if a distance triggered conveyor is used.
Continues on next page
99 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.6 Adding work area
Continued
Procedure
Signal
Trig
Strobe
Description
If vision is used this digital output signal must be connected to the trigger input on the I/O port on the camera.
This is the input signal name for the strobe signal and is the start signal for the encoder board for the conveyor.
If only select the Strobe signal, the robot will pick and place for just one time.
If a continuous picking and placing is needed, set the Strobe signal and Queue idle signal as the same one. And a sensor from the customer is needed to trigger the cycle.
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Layout .
Use this procedure to add a indexed work area:
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Indexed Workarea .
xx1800001426
The Conveyor window opens.
100 xx1800001427
2 In the Indexed Workarea window, enter a name in the Workarea Name text box or use the default one.
3 Select the required work area type and configure the settings.
4 Click OK .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.7 Adding Item
4.2.7 Adding Item
Overview
An item is the object that is picked and placed by the robot. It is most common to use only one item for both pick and place but any number of items can be created.
The grip location of an item defines the pick/place position relative to the item position.
This section describes how to add an item.
xx1900000591
Adding an item
The New Item window opens as illustrated below.
xx1800001432
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
101
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.7 Adding Item
Continued
Item Properties xx1800001430
Item Properties
Item Name
Item Type
Description
Allows you to change the name.
Allows you to change the shape of the item.
RH Size (mm) Allows you to configure the size of the item.
Appearance Properties
Templates
Color
Label Location
Label Picture
Use Texture
Show Contour
Show Orientation
Marker
Rapid properties
Description
Default Settings tab allows you to choose one of the preset templates.
Default Name text box allows you to enter the name for a new template.
Save icon allows you to save your new template.
Delete icon allows you to delete your templates.
Allows you to change the color of the new item.
Allows you to set the location of the label on the item.
Allows you to select an image file for the label picture.
Allows you to use a texture image file for the item or container.
Allows you to choose to show the contour or not.
Allows you to choose to show the orientation maker or not.
Allows you to define the values for accepted or rejected item types.
The values for the accepted and rejected item type are sent to the
RAPID program and are supplied with the item targets. For more details see,
GetItmTgt - Get the next item target on page 364
.
Continues on next page
102 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.7 Adding Item
Continued
Item Source xx1800001431
Source Type
Description
Vision : If the source type is set to Vision , a camera and vision models are used to find the object positions. The vision models are described in section
Adding vision model on page 245 .
Predefined : If the source type is set to Predefined , the positions generated by the position source are statically defined and no camera is used.
Note
If the user changes the source type of an item, the user need to redo the selection in the related recipe setting accordingly.
Vision Models For more information regarding Vision Models see the following section.
Vision Models
Description
Geometric Allows you to add a gemetric vision model.
A geometric sub inspection model is configured in the same way as a PatMax model. See
Configuring a geometric model with PatMax on page 246
. In addition, the relative positions of the found items and the corresponding alignment hit must be trained.
Blob Allows you to add a blob vision model.
A blob sub inspection model is configured in the same way as a blob model.
See
Configuring blob models on page 257
. In addition, the number of required hits must be configured.
Inspection Allows you to add an inspection vision model.
A blob sub inspection model is configured in the same way as a blob model.
See
Configuring blob models on page 257
. In addition, the number of required hits must be configured.
External Allows you to add an external sensor.
This function is reserved for next version.
Import
Export
Delete
Allows you to import a selected vision model.
Allows you to export a selected vision model.
Allows you to delete a selected vision model.
Continues on next page
103 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.7 Adding Item
Continued
Procedure
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Recipe .
xx1800001438
Use this procedure to add an item:
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Item .
xx1800001429
The New Item window opens.
xx1800001430
2 If needed, define levels for accepted or rejected item types.
When inspection is used, a found item will be marked as either accepted or rejected. The values for accepted and rejected item type in the Item
Configuration dialog are sent to the RAPID program and are processed there. See
Configuring inspection models on page 264
.
3 In the RH Size part, define the item’s size.
The height of the item defines the pick height and is always added to items found by a vision model or a position defined by a predefined position source.
4 Click OK .
Related information
Configuring inspection models on page 264 .
104 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
4.2.8 Adding Container
Overview
A container defines which patterns to use and what items to use for each position in the patterns. This way, different containers can use the same patterns but with different items.
This section describes how to add a container.
xx1900000591
Prerequisites
At least one item must be defined in the solution before configuring the container.
Adding a container
The Container window opens as illustrated below.
xx1800001437
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
105
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
Container Properties xx1800001434
Container Properties
LWH Size (mm)
Description
Container Name Allows you to change the name.
Allows you to configure the size of the container.
Appearance Properties
Templates
Color
Label Location
Label Picture
Description
Default Settings tab allows you to choose one of the preset templates.
Default Name text box allows you to enter the name for a new template.
Save icon allows you to save your new template.
Delete icon allows you to delete your templates.
Allows you to change the color of the new item.
Allows you to set the location of the label on the item.
Allows you to select an image file for the label picture.
Use Texture
Show Contour
Allows you to use a texture image file for the item or container.
Allows you to choose to show the contour or not.
Show Orientation Marker Allows you to choose to show the orientation maker or not.
Continues on next page
106 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
Container Pattern
A pattern defines a collection of positions. For example, a box with predefined locations for certain objects. You can change the order, delete, or rearrange the selected layers using the available options. You can adjust the vertical position of each layer by modifying the Offset (mm). You can also manage the sorting method.
The Sorting Method section defines the order in which the items in the container pattern shall be handled by the robots.
xx1800001435
Description
Sorting Method Configure the signals. Use the Customized Settings options to manage the signals.
None options: The items in the layer shall be accessed in the same order as they are defined in the layout for each layer, but if the next item cannot be reached the next one after that is used.
X Direction options: The items shall be accessed in the X direction for each layer, that is, in the order they travel along a conveyor.
Strict options: The items shall be used in the same order as they are defined in the layout for each layer. If a robot cannot access the next item position in a layer, that robot does not use any more item positions in the container pattern.
Add Layer
Edit Layer
Allows you to add a new layer.
For more information regarding Add Layer see the following section.
Allows you to edit the selected layer.
Delete Layer
Delete All
Copy
Up
Down
Total Weight
Allows you to delete the selected layer.
Allows you to delete all the existing layers.
Allows you to copy the selected layer.
Allows you to move the selected layer to a upper level.
Allows you to move the selected layer to a lower level.
Enter the total weight of all the items.
Continues on next page
107 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
Total Height
Total Count
Add Layer
Description
Enter the total height of all the items.
Enter the total count of all the items.
xx1900000561
Layer ID
Description
Allows you to rename the layer.
Pattern Template Allows you to select a predefined pattern template.
Available Items
Align Style
Distribute Style
The drop down list allows you to select one item you have created for this system.
Add icon allows you to add the selected item onto the layer.
Allows you to define the align style when you have more than one item in the layer.
Left icon allows you to align all the items in this layer from the left.
Right icon allows you to align all the items in this layer from the right.
Center icon allows you to align all the items in this layer from the center.
Middle icon allows you to align all the items in this layer from the middle.
Top icon allows you to align all the items in this layer at from top.
Bottom icon allows you to align all the items in this layer from the bottom.
Allows you to define the distribution style when you have more than one item in the layer.
Horizontally icon allows you to distribute all the items in the horizontal direction.
Vertically icon allows you to distribute all the items in the vertical direction.
Else Functions
Selected Item(s)
Rotate icon allows you to rotate the selected items.
Delete icon allows you to delete the selected items.
Select All icon allows you to select all the items in the layer.
Show Item Name checkbox allows you to show the name of the items.
Show Item Order checkbox allows you to show the added order of the items.
Allows you to define the location and position of each items.
Continues on next page
108 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
Container Source
Vision Models xx1800001436
Source Type
Description
Vision : If the source type is set to Vision , a camera and vision models are used to find the object positions. The vision models are described in section
Adding vision model on page 245 .
Predefined : If the source type is set to Predefined , the positions generated by the position source are statically defined and no camera is used.
Vision Models For more information regarding Vision Models see the following section.
Description
Geometric Allows you to add a gemetric vision model.
A geometric sub inspection model is configured in the same way as a PatMax model. See
Configuring a geometric model with PatMax on page 246
. In addition, the relative positions of the found items and the corresponding alignment hit must be trained.
Blob Allows you to add a blob vision model.
A blob sub inspection model is configured in the same way as a blob model.
See
Configuring blob models on page 257
. In addition, the number of required hits must be configured.
Inspection Allows you to add an inspection vision model.
A blob sub inspection model is configured in the same way as a blob model.
See
Configuring blob models on page 257
. In addition, the number of required hits must be configured.
External Allows you to add an external sensor.
This function is reserved for next version.
Import
Export
Delete
Allows you to import a selected vision model.
Allows you to export a selected vision model.
Allows you to delete a selected vision model.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
109
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
Procedure
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Recipe .
xx1800001438
Use this procedure to add a container :
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Container .
xx1800001433
The Container window opens.
xx1800001437
2 Define the container with your requirements in the Container Properties tab.
3 Define the container pattern with your requirements in the Container Pattern tab.
Continues on next page
110 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
4 If need, adjust the layout of the items on the layer.
xx2000000294
A Select all items on the layer.
xx2000000295
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
111
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
B Click 'Ctrl' and select the base item at the same time.
xx2000000296
C Click Left to align all items on the left edge according to the base item.
Continues on next page
112 xx2000000297
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
Click Right to align all items on the right edge according to the base item.
xx2000000298
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
113
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
Click Center to align all items on the centre line vertically according to the base item.
xx2000000299
Continues on next page
114 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
Click Middle to align all items on the centre line horizontally according to the base item.
xx2000000300
Click Top to align all items on the top edge according to the base item.
xx2000000301
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
115
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
Click Bottom to align all items on the bottom edge according to the base item.
xx2000000302
Continues on next page
116 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
D Click Horizontally to set all items tangent in horizontal direction.
xx2000000303
Click Vertically to set all items tangent in vertical direction.
xx2000000304
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
117
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.8 Adding Container
Continued
5 Click OK .
The container is saved and the window is closed.
118 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Overview
This section describes how to add a recipe.
In one solution, several recipes can be created. All elements (Robots, sensor and so on) in this solution can be added to any recipes with no limits.
Adding a recipe
The Recipe window opens as illustrated below.
Properties xx1800001439 xx1800001440
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
119
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
Available Devices
Available Devices
Available Workareas
Description
Allows you to define the available devices, including robots and conveyors.
For more information regarding Available Device see the following section.
Allows you to define the available workareas.
For more information regarding Available Workareas see the following section.
xx1900000547
Recipe Name
Robot Setting
Conveyor Setting
Description
Allows you to rename the recipe.
Note
If there are more than one robot in this system, all the robot will be listed here with their defined name.
Rapid Editor allows you specify the editor to open Rapid.
Speed allows you to change the speed of the robot.
Rapid allows you to import/export/edit the rapid of the robot.
Note
To do multiple pick, import the Multiple-Pick rapid file in the installation package for the required robots.
Speed allows you to change the speed of the conveyor.
Acceleration allows you to change the acceleration of the conveyor.
Deceleration allows you to change the deceleration of the conveyor.
Continues on next page
120 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Available Workareas
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued xx1800001442
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
121
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
Pick Setting
Description
Pick/place elevation is the distance, in negative z-direction relative to the tool, from where the robot approaches the item target.
Pick/place time is the time the robot is in the pick/place position.
If the conveyor is moving during the pick/place time, the robot will track along the conveyor to keep the relative position on the moving conveyor.
Vacuum activation is the time in seconds before the middle of the corner path of the approaching position, when the vacuum
I/O should be set. If a negative value is entered, the vacuum
I/O will be set the time after the middle of the corner path. This value is only valid for work areas of type Pick or Other .
Note
Vacuum activation does not affect the picking of items in simulation. Items are attached to the picking tool using
SimAttach events, for example, in the Pick Routine.
Vacuum reversion is the time in seconds before the half place time in the place position, when the blow I/O should be set. If a negative value is entered, the blow I/O will be set the time after the half place time in the place position. This value is only valid for work areas of type Place or Other .
Note
Vacuum reversion does not affect the placing of items in simulation. Items are detached from the picking tool using
SimDetach events, for example, in the Place Routine.
Vacuum off is the time in seconds after the half place time in the place position, when the blow I/O should be reset. If a negative value is entered, the blow I/O will be reset the time before the half place time in the place position. This value is only valid for work areas of type Place or Other .
Note
Vacuum Off does not affect the placing of items in simulation.
Items are detached from the picking tool using SimDetach events, for example, in the Place Routine.
Continues on next page
122 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Area Setting
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
Description
After you define a start entry in a work area which may called
Start X , you can define a same start entry which may called
Start Y at the vertical direction of the Start X.
Enter is the limit from where the robot starts to execute item targets on the work area (Start X). The distance is calculated in millimeters from the center of the robot. The range is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, relative to the moving direction of the conveyor. Make sure that the enter limit can be reached by the robot.
Start is when the next item to execute on the conveyor is above this limit, the conveyor is started. The distance is calculated in millimeters from the center of the robot. The range is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, relative to the moving direction of the conveyor.
Stop is when an item on the conveyor reaches this limit, the conveyor is stopped. The distance is calculated in millimeters from the center of the robot. The range is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, relative to the moving direction of the conveyor.
Exit is the limit from where the robot considers an item target as lost on the work area (Start X). The distance is calculated in millimeters from the center of the robot. The range is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, relative to the moving direction of the conveyor. When the tracked item passes beyond this limit it will be dropped. This limit must be chosen well within the maximum reach of the robot. The robot must be able to reach this position from an arbitrary position in the robot’s working area before the position is out of reach.
Select the Use Start/Stop checkbox if the work area should supervise the start and stop limits.
This is handled by the Conveyor start/stop signal, see
.
Select the Start on production start checkbox if the work area should work with the conveyor when the production is started, and stopped when the production is stopped.
UpperLimit is the limit form where robot considers an item target as lost on the work area in End Y.The distance is calculated in milli-meters from the center of the robot. The range is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, relative to the moving vertical direction of the conveyor.Make sure that the enter limit can be reached by the robot.
LowerLimit is the limit form where robot starts to execute item targets on the work area in Start Y. The distance is calculated in milli-meters from the center of the robot. The range is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, relative to the moving vertical direction of the conveyor.If the y coordinate value of the item's position is greater than the UpperLimit, the robot will not grab the item. So when the tracked item passes beyond this limit it will be dropped. This limit must be chosen well within the maximum reach of the robot.
Use UpperLimit/LowerLimit checkbox if the work area should supervise the upper and lower limits.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
123
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
Description
Record Setting
A
B
C
D
I
E
F
G
J
K
H
D
E
F
A
B
C
I
J
G
H
K xx1800001747
Camera and Baseframe origin
Camera
Enter
Start
Stop
Exit
Robot
Image frame
Center of Robot
UpperLimit
LowerLimit
Allows you to record the position of the items and containers in simulation and production.
Continues on next page
124 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Operation
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
The operation contains pick operation and place operation.
Main Setting xx1800001443
Main Setting tab
Trigger/Filter Setting
Distribution Setting
Description
Allows you to define some basic settings for the operation, such as operation name, flow, source type.
For more information regarding Main Setting see the following section.
Allows you to define the trigger and filter setting for the operation.
For more information regarding Trigger/Filter Setting see the following section.
Allows you to define the distribution setting for the operation.
For more information regarding Distribution Setting see the following section.
Operation Name
Description
Allows you to rename the operation.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
125
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
Operation Type
Associated Conveyor
Select Flow
Select Hotspot
Detection Setting
Description
Show you the type of the operation. This is predefined when you add a conveyor work area.
Note
The type of the operation cannot be changed here.
You can only access to another kind of operation by click on that operation.
Show you the associated conveyor. This is predefined when you add a conveyor work area.
Allows you to select the flow you defined.
Allows you to select the hotspot you defined.
Source Type allows you to select the input signal source type:
• Vision : If the source type is set to Vision , a camera and vision models are used to find the object positions. The vision models are described in section
Adding vision model on page 245
.
Tip
If the source type is set to Vision , all available cameras and related items will be listed in the Available Camera .
• Predefined : If the source type is set to Predefined , the positions generated by the position source are statically defined and no camera is used.
Available Camera allows you to select the camera with your requirements for this operation.
Available Objects allows you to select the objects with your requirements for this operation.
Available Workareas allows you to select the work area with your requirements for this operation.
Every picking or placing operation must be associated with a properly configured work area. The item to be operated by this pick or place needs to be set in recipe. If you use a camera to detect the position of the item, the corresponding camera also needs to be set in recipe too.
Continues on next page
126 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Trigger/Filter Setting
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued xx1800001444
Trigger Setting
Description
Select Trigger type to define when to generate new item positions.
If the trigger type is set to Distance the trigger distance must be defined in the Trigger distance box.
A distance trigger can only be used with a conveyor work area and the entered value is the distance the conveyor should move between consecutive triggers.
If the trigger type is set to I/O , the trigger distance are predefined.
CAUTION
If the Predefined and IO sensor are selected in the recipe, tune the pick location in the Tuning for a radial distance to make up the offset.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
127
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
Filter Setting
Description
In the Position Filter Distance part, define the minimum allowed distance between two item positions found by a camera or an external sensor.
For example, if two or more models are used to identify the same object, there might be one hit for each model at almost the same location. If two positions for the same item are closer in either x- or y-direction than the defined minimum item distance, only the position with the highest sort value will be sent to the robot controller. The sort value can be set for each vision model, see
Adding vision model on page 245
.
In the Overlap filter define the overlap distance.
For example, items can be identified in two consecutive frames due to the overlap. The models can have a small variation in the pick/place position between these frames. Items that are found in two consecutive frames and whose pick/place position between these two frames does not vary by more than the overlap filter distance will be regarded as one item. The first identified hit is sent to the robot, and any subsequent hit is filtered out.
Position filter
The position filter defines the minimum allowed distance between the different item positions found by a camera or an external sensor. For example, if two or more models are used to identify the same object, there might be one hit for each model at about the same location. If the two positions for the same item are closer in either X- or Y-direction the given minimum item distance, only the position with the highest sort value is sent to the robot controller. The sort value can be set for each vision model. For more details, see
Adding vision model on page 245 . If
Same level only is selected, the filtering will only be done between item positions with the same inspection level.
Note
The position filter is not used while predefined positions are used . The position filter is therefore disabled in the Position Source Configuration window when
Predefined is selected.
Overlap filter
Items can be identified in two consecutive frames due to the overlap. The models can have a small variation in the pick/place position between these frames. The items that are found in two consecutive frames and whose pick/place position between these two frames does not vary more than the overlap filter distance are regarded as one item.
Distribution Setting
By default all positions are sent to the same work area. It is possible to distribute item positions to more than one work area to balance the load between several robots or to guarantee that all positions are accessed.
Continues on next page
128 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
All positions for a specific item type are distributed to the robots by a single item distributor. There are four types of item distributors.
• Work area: The item positions are handled by a single conveyor or indexed work area.
• ByPass: The item positions are discarded, that is not handled by any work area. If no distributor is selected for an item type it will be considered as
ByPass.
• LB group: The item positions are handled by the work areas included in a load balance group. Aload balance group is a collection of Work area, ByPass, and ATC group distributors. Item positions will be distributed among the work areas in an optimal way to avoid sending two adjacent positions to the same work area.
• ATC group: Positions are handled by the work areas included in an Adaptive
Task Completion (ATC) group. An ATC group is a collection of ordered work areas that will get the same item positions. The first robot accesses as many positions as possible. The other robots in the ATC group will access any missed positions. If the last work area in the group is a conveyor work area with start and stop it is guaranteed that all positions will be accessed.
To use either load balancing or ATC the work areas must be arranged in the order that they occur after the position source (for example: the camera or sensor).
The work area that triggers the position source is set automatically. When starting a production, the work area for the robot that is first up and running is set to be the trigger work area. If the robot for a trigger work area is stopped, a work area for another robot that is running will be the one that triggers the position source.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
129
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
The item distribution tree control shows the items for which positions are to be generated. Accepted and rejected items can be distributed differently.
Distribution
Load balance xx1800001445
Available Items
Distribution
Description
Show you the available items for this operation.
Allows you to set the distribution strategy as accept or Reject.
Available Distributor Show you the available distributor for this operation.
Item positions that are distributed by a load balance group are divided among the distributors in the group. A load balance group can contain any number of item distributors and a single distributor can appear several times. The ratio between the number of times a single distributor is added and the total number of distributors defines the ratio of the item positions that are sent by that particular distributor.
Item positions are arranged to the distributors in the group in an optimal way to avoid adjacent positions to be sent to the same work area.
If Adaptive Task Completion is selected, any defined ATC groups will be listed among the available distributors. Additionally, ATC groups can be added to load
Continues on next page
130 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued balance groups. However, to achieve task completion, the load balance group should only contain ATC groups.
xx1800001446
Description
Load Balance Group Show you the created load balance group.
Available Distributor Show you the available distributor for this operation.
Create Group
Delete Group
Allows you to create a load balance group.
Allows you to delete a load balance group.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
131
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
ATC
Adaptive Task Completion guarantees the item positions to be accessed by any robot in an ATC group. An ATC group contains ordered work areas and a single work area is allowed to exist once in a group. All item positions distributed to an
ATC group are sent to every work area in the group and the positions not accessed by the first work area will be accessed by any of the other work areas. If the last work area is on a conveyor with start and stop it is guaranteed that all item positions will be accessed by one of the robots in the ATC group.
xx1800001447
Adaptive Task Completion
Group
Available Distributor
Create Group
Delete Group
Description
Show you the created adaptive task completion group.
Show you the available distributor for this operation.
Allows you to create a adaptive task completion group.
Allows you to delete a adaptive task completion group.
Continues on next page
132 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Procedure
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Layout .
xx1800001438
Use this procedure to add a recipe:
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Recipe .
xx1800001438
The Recipe window opens.
xx1800001439
2 Click on the Pick Operation1 to open the setting window for the pick operation.
3 Select the Source Type according to your requirements.
Note
Predefined in the Source Type and Flow cannot be selected together.
4 If need, click to select the cameras in Available Camera .
5 If need, click to select the applicable flow in Select Flow .
6 Click to select the item in Available Objects .
7 Click to select the work area in Available Workareas .
Continues on next page
133 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.9 Adding Recipe
Continued
8 In the Trigger/Filter Setting tab, define the trigger or filter setting according to your requirements.
9 In the Distribution tab, drag distributors from the Available distributors list to the Distribution list.
There can be only one distributor for each item type. If an item type is missing a distributor, it will be regarded as ByPass.
10 If using load balancing, in the Load balance tab, drag a distributor from the
Available distributors list to a group in the list Load balance groups .
To create a new load balance group, double-click <New LbGroup> in the
Available distributors list.
Select rebalancing strategy.
11 If using Adaptive Task Completion, in the ATC tab, drag a work area from the Available work areas list to the Adaptive Task Completion groups list.
12 Click OK .
The window is closed.
Redistributing items from one robot to downstream robots
It is possible to modify the distribution of alredy distributed item positions when they enter a conveyor work area of a robot. The Rapid program, that controls the robot, based on current flow conditions decides to skip an item position and change the type of it. As a result, PickMaster PowerPac will redistribute the item position to downstream robots according to the configured distribution strategy for the selected item type.
134 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Overview
A flow is used to define how the items and containers are to be generated in the simulation. A flow is attached to a hot spot on a conveyor or an indexed work area in the job configuration. When attaching the flow, the hot spot becomes a source from where items and containers appear in the simulation according to the flow configuration. Following are the two types of flows:
• Layout: A Layout flow is a predefined layout that is periodically regenerated at the hot spot. The layout may have some random variation regarding the locations of items or containers and the availability of them. The layout may consists of different items or container patterns.
• Recorded: A recorded flow is a recording of a sensor from a real solution in operation. The recording is exported from PickMaster PowerPac as an xml file having information of all the detected items and containers during a time interval. When the file is imported, the items detected are mapped to the configured items and container patterns.
Adding a flow
The Flow window opens as illustrated below.
xx1800001743
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
135
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Add Rectangle Flow
Item/Containers xx1900000581
Description
Item/Containers Allows you to add items and containers for the flow.
For more information regarding Item/Containers see the following section.
Flow properties Allows you to define the flow.
For more information regarding Flow properties see the following section.
xx1900000580
Name
Description
Allows you to rename the flow.
Add item Allows you to add an item for the flow.
Add pattern Allows you to add pattern for the flow.
Delete Allows you to delete the selected item or pattern in the flow.
Continues on next page
136 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Flow properties xx1900000583
Flow Type
Layout Regenerate
Dist
Conveyor Speed
Description
Allows you to choose the type the flow.
LAYOUT : the position of the items and containers in the flow.
Recorded : run a simulation according to the recorded position of the items and containers.
GhostPicking : run a production according to the recorded position of the items and containers without entities.
The distance between consecutive flow layouts generated on a conveyor. Not used with recorded flows.
When select this radio button, you can change the speed of the conveyor when the flow is assigned to a conveyor.
Throughput
Note
You can only choose one from Conveyor Speed and Throughput .
When select this radio button, you can change the item throughput of the conveyor when running the flow.
Note
You can only choose one from Conveyor Speed and Throughput .
Stability
Position Stability
Orientation Stability
If set to 100%, the generated items always have correct position. A lower value defines the probability that an item gets the correct position.
If set to 100%, the generated items always have correct orientation.
A lower value defines the probability that an item gets correct orientation.
X pos dev min/max
If set to 100%, all the items in the layout are generated on every trigger without losses. A lower value defines the probability that an item in the layout is generated.
Y pos dev min/max
Defines the minimum and maximum deviation of the X position from the correct value.
Defines the minimum and maximum deviation of the Y position from the correct value.
Continues on next page
137 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Z pos dev min/max
Rejection Ratio
Layout Size
Description
Defines the minimum and maximum deviation of the Z position from the correct value.
Defines the probability that an item becomes rejected by a camera.
If set to 0%, the item setting “Rejected” in the Layout will decide if the item is rejected.
Allows you to edit the size of the layout.
Edit Layout allows you to edit the selected flow.
For more information regarding Edit Layout see the following section.
Edit Layout xx1900000584
Layer ID
Description
Allows you to rename the layer.
Pattern Template Allows you to select a predefined pattern template.
Available Objs
Align Style
Distribute Style
The drop down list allows you to select one item you have created for this system.
Add icon allows you to add the selected item onto the layer.
Allows you to define the align style when you have more than one item in the layer.
Left icon allows you to align all the items in this layer from the left.
Right icon allows you to align all the items in this layer from the right.
Center icon allows you to align all the items in this layer from the center.
Middle icon allows you to align all the items in this layer from the middle.
Top icon allows you to align all the items in this layer at from top.
Bottom icon allows you to align all the items in this layer from the bottom.
Allows you to define the distribution style when you have more than one item in the layer.
Horizontally icon allows you to distribute all the items in the horizontal direction.
Vertically icon allows you to distribute all the items in the vertical direction.
Continues on next page
138 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Else Functions
Selected Item(s)
Description
Rotate icon allows you to rotate the selected items.
Delete icon allows you to delete the selected items.
Select All icon allows you to select all the items in the layer.
Show Item Name checkbox allows you to show the name of the items.
Show Item Order checkbox allows you to show the added order of the items.
Allows you to define the location and position of each items.
Add a rectangle flow procedure
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Recipe .
xx1800001438
Use this procedure to add a rectangle flow:
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Recipe .
xx1800001721
The Create Sim Flow window is opened.
xx1800001722
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
139
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
2 Click Add Rectangle Flow to add a rectangle flow.
xx1900000581
Continues on next page
140 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
A new rectangle flow is created.
xx1800001723
3 Click Add Item in the Item/Container tab to add an item for the flow.
4 Click Add Pattern in the Item/Container tab to add a pattern for the flow.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
141
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
5 Click Flow properties in the Item/Container tab to edit the data according to the requirements..
xx1800001724
6 Click the Edit Layout icon to open the dialog.
7 Click the Add icon in the Edit Layout dialog to add an item.
xx1800001726
Continues on next page
142 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
A Select all items on the layer.
xx2000000295
B Click 'Ctrl' and select the base item at the same time.
xx2000000296
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
143
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
C Click Left to align all items on the left edge according to the base item.
xx2000000297
Continues on next page
144 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Click Right to align all items on the right edge according to the base item.
xx2000000298
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
145
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Click Center to align all items on the centre line vertically according to the base item.
xx2000000299
Continues on next page
146 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Click Middle to align all items on the centre line horizontally according to the base item.
xx2000000300
Click Top to align all items on the top edge according to the base item.
xx2000000301
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
147
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Click Bottom to align all items on the bottom edge according to the base item.
xx2000000302
Continues on next page
148 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
D Click Horizontally to set all items tangent in horizontal direction.
xx2000000303
Click Vertically to set all items tangent in vertical direction.
xx2000000304
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
149
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
8 Click OK to apply the configuration.
9 Click OK to close the Create Sim Flow dialog.
Add Sector Flow
Item/Containers xx1900000582
Description
Item/Containers Allows you to add items and containers for the flow.
For more information regarding Item/Containers see the following section.
Flow properties Allows you to define the flow.
For more information regarding Flow properties see the following section.
xx1900000580
Name
Description
Allows you to rename the flow.
Add item Allows you to add an item for the flow.
Add pattern Allows you to add pattern for the flow.
Delete Allows you to delete the selected item or pattern in the flow.
Continues on next page
150 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Flow properties xx1900000583
Flow Type
Layout Regenerate
Dist
Conveyor Speed
Description
Allows you to choose the type the flow.
LAYOUT : the position of the items and containers in the flow.
Recorded : run a simulation according to the recorded position of the items and containers.
GhostPicking : run a production according to the recorded position of the items and containers without entities.
The distance between consecutive flow layouts generated on a conveyor. Not used with recorded flows.
When select this radio button, you can change the speed of the conveyor when the flow is assigned to a conveyor.
Throughput
Note
You can only choose one from Conveyor Speed and Throughput .
When select this radio button, you can change the item throughput of the conveyor when running the flow.
Note
You can only choose one from Conveyor Speed and Throughput .
Stability
Position Stability
Orientation Stability
X pos dev min/max
Y pos dev min/max
If set to 100%, all the items in the layout are generated on every trigger without losses. A lower value defines the probability that an item in the layout is generated.
If set to 100%, the generated items always have correct position.
A lower value defines the probability that an item gets the correct position.
If set to 100%, the generated items always have correct orientation.
A lower value defines the probability that an item gets correct orientation.
Defines the minimum and maximum deviation of the X position from the correct value.
Defines the minimum and maximum deviation of the Y position from the correct value.
Continues on next page
151 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Z pos dev min/max
Rejection Ratio
Inner Outer Radius
Description
Defines the minimum and maximum deviation of the Z position from the correct value.
Defines the probability that an item becomes rejected by a camera.
If set to 0%, the item setting “Rejected” in the Layout will decide if the item is rejected.
Allows you to edit the inner and outer radius of the working area.
Edit Layout allows you to edit the selected flow.
For more information regarding Edit Layout see the following section.
Sector Angle(deg)
Edit Layout xx1900000585
Description
Layer ID Allows you to rename the layer.
Pattern Template Allows you to select a predefined pattern template.
Available Objs
Else Functions
The drop down list allows you to select one item you have created for this system.
Add icon allows you to add the selected item onto the layer.
Rotate icon allows you to rotate the selected items.
Delete icon allows you to delete the selected items.
Select All icon allows you to select all the items in the layer.
Show Item Name checkbox allows you to show the name of the items.
Show Item Order checkbox allows you to show the added order of the items.
Selected Item(s) Allows you to define the location and position of each items.
Continues on next page
152 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
Add a sector flow procedure
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Recipe .
xx1800001438
Use this procedure to add a sector flow:
1 On the ribbon-tab, click Flow .
xx1800001721
The Create Sim Flow window is opened.
xx1800001722
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
153
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
2 Click Add Sector Flow to add a sector flow.
xx1900000582
Continues on next page
154 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
A new flow is created.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued xx1800001723
3 Click Add Item in the Item/Container tab to add an item for the flow.
4 Click Add Pattern in the Item/Container tab to add a pattern for the flow.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
155
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.10 Adding Flow
Continued
5 Click Flow properties in the Item/Container tab to edit the data according to the requirements.
xx1800001724
6 Click the Edit Layout icon to open the dialog.
7 Click the Add icon in the Edit Layout dialog to add an item.
156 xx1800001726
8 Click OK to apply the configuration.
9 Click OK to close the Create Sim Flow dialog.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.11 Calibration
4.2.11 Calibration
Overview
This section describes how to calibrate the created solution.
The calibration in PickMaster PowerPac is a prerequisite for running the simulation.
The calibration is different with the calibration of the actual hardware (camera, conveyor, IO sensor, etc.). Running this calibration does not mean that the actual hardware calibration has been completed.
The calibration in PickMaster PowerPac is used to establish the relative relationship between the conveyor base frame and the robot base coordinate system in the virtual controller.
If a camera is used for a linear conveyor in the solution, the base frame of the conveyor is directly below the camera after calibration (x is the forward direction).
If an IO sensor is used for a linear conveyor, the base frame of the conveyor is located at the IO sensor. If a pre-defined point is not used for a linear conveyor, the base frame of the conveyor overlaps the hot spot.
Indexed work area calibration is consistent with linear conveyor's calibration.
The calibrated base coordinate system of the circular conveyor belt is located at the center of the conveyor belt, and the x-direction points directly below the camera or along the IO sensor. If the circular conveyor uses a predefined point, the x direction points to a predefined coordinate point.
Calibration
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Simulation .
Use this procedure to calibrate:
1 Click to select the recipe that need to calibrate.
Note
If the layout in the solution changes, such as changing the camera position or robot position, redo the calibration.
Note
Each recipe in a solution needs to be individually calibrated.
If different recipes use different layouts, after running a simulation of recipe
A, you need to use another recipe B for simulation, then you must calibrate recipe B first.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
157
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.11 Calibration
Continued
2 Click Calibration on the ribbon-tab. Then it will start to calibrate the created solution automatically.
xx1800001448
The calibration runs automatically.
xx1800001449
158 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
4.2.12 Simulation
Overview
This section describes how to do the simulation with the created solution.
Production
All operations in the simulation production are reflected in the station view, and all data comes from the solution.
xx1800001738
Statics
Tuning
Description
Allows you to control the status of the production and have an overview of the production data.
For more information regarding Statics see the following section.
Allows you to adjust the parameters of the item, work area and robot.
For more information regarding Tuning see the following section.
Flow Control Allows you to adjust the speed of the conveyor.
For more information regarding Flow Control see the following section.
Vision Allows you to see the live video of the camera.
This function is only available in the real production and emulation. For more information, see
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
159
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued
Statics
Tuning xx1900000644
Description
Recipe Status Allows you to control the status of the production.
Picking Status Allows you to have an overview of the picking status in summary or detail.
Sometimes, the exact pick and place positions are not exactly where expected.
This might be caused by a small error in the calibration of either the camera or the work area. It is possible to adjust the positions while running a project. This is called tuning.
Description
Recipe Status Allows you to control the status of the production.
Type Allows you to choose the objects in the solution and change their parameters.
Continues on next page
160 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Tuning the item
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued xx1900000594
GripX
GripY
Description
Allows you to set the location of the gripper when doing the picking and placing operation in X direction.
Allows you to set the location of the gripper when doing the picking and placing operation in Y direction.
GripZ Allows you to set the location of the gripper when doing the picking and placing operation in Z direction.
GripAngleX Allows you to set the angle of the gripper when doing the picking and placing operation in X direction.
Note
The angle cannot be out of the physical limits. Or the robot will not work normally.
For example, trying to rotate the gripper of an IRB 360 robot in X or Y direction will cause an error. Redo the simulation after the error occurred.
GripAngleY Allows you to set the angle of the gripper when doing the picking and placing operation in Y direction.
Note
The angle cannot be out of the physical limits. Or the robot will not work normally.
For example, trying to rotate the gripper of an IRB 360 robot in X or Y direction will cause an error. Redo the simulation after the error occurred.
Continues on next page
161 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued
Description
GripAngleZ Allows you to set the angle of the gripper when doing the picking and placing operation in Z direction.
Note
The angle cannot be out of the physical limits. Or the robot will not work normally.
Configuring the grip location
Use this procedure to configure the item’s grip location.
1 Select the Type as Item and select the required item.
2 Define the positions in millimeters for the grip position of the item specified in X’, Y’, and Z’ coordinates. The positions are relative to the origin of the taught model (Vision model grip point). See the following graphic.
xx0900000522
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
Camera
Adjusted grip point
Vision model grip point
Item height
Angle X
Angle Y
Conveyor direction
Continues on next page
162
3 Define the Euler orientation in degrees for the grip orientation on the item.
A four axes robot (that is IRB 360) can only rotate around the z-axis and therefore only GripAngleZ can be used.
Six axes robots can pick/place 3D items by defining Euler orientation
GripAngleX , GripAngleY and the item height. The grip orientation has an orientation in relation to the origin of the taught model (Vision model grip point). The item height must be specified in the Item configuration dialog, as a distance from the base frame to the item origin (vision model grip point).
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Tuning the work area
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued
It is important to define a correct calibration tool when calibrating the base frame of the conveyor, so the orientation in relation to the items grip point
(place/pick) will be correct. It is also important to do the camera calibration at the same height as the item’s grip point, that is vision model grip point.
xx1900000595
TuneX
TuneY
TuneZ
Description
Allows you to tune the position of the work area along the X direction when running simulation or production.
Tuning the position of the work area along the X direction is equivalent to offsetting the conveyor base frame along the X direction.
Allows you to tune the position of the work area along the Y direction when running simulation or production.
Tuning the position of the work area along the Y direction is equivalent to offsetting the conveyor base frame along the Y direction.
Allows you to tune the position of the work area along the Z direction when running simulation or production.
Tuning the position of the work area along the Z direction is equivalent to offsetting the conveyor base frame along the Z direction.
ConveyorEnter Enter is the limit from where the robot starts to execute item targets on the work area. The distance is calculated in millimeters from the center of the robot. The range is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, relative to the moving direction of the conveyor. Make sure that the enter limit can be reached by the robot.
ConveyorExit Exit is the limit from where the robot considers an item target as lost on the work area. The distance is calculated in millimeters from the center of the robot. The range is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, relative to the moving direction of the conveyor. When the tracked item passes beyond this limit it will be dropped. This limit must be chosen well within the maximum reach of the robot. The robot must be able to reach this position from an arbitrary position in the robot’s working area before the position is out of reach.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
163
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued
Description
ConveyorUpperLimit Note
To enable this function, you need to select the checkbox for this function in the recipe configuration page.
xx1900001568
Note
The UpperLimit/LowerLimit function in the Tunning window has a slight delay.
UpperLimit is the limit form where robot considers an item target as lost on the work area in End
Y.The distance is calculated in milli-meters from the center of the robot. The range is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, relative to the moving vertical direction of the conveyor.Make sure that the enter limit can be reached by the robot.
Continues on next page
164 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued
Conveyor-
LowerLimit
Description
Note
To enable this function, you need to select the checkbox for this function in the recipe configuration page.
xx1900001568
Note
The UpperLimit/LowerLimit function in the Tunning window has a slight delay.
LowerLimit is the limit form where robot starts to execute item targets on the work area in Start Y.
The distance is calculated in milli-meters from the center of the robot. The range is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, relative to the moving vertical direction of the conveyor.If
the y coordinate value of the item's position is greater than the UpperLimit, the robot will not grab the item. So when the tracked item passes beyond this limit it will be dropped. This limit must be chosen well within the maximum reach of the robot.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
165
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued
Description
B
C
D
I
E
F
A
G
H xx1000001344
A
I
H
F
G
B
C
D
E
Camera and Baseframe origin
Camera
Enter
Start
Stop
Exit
Robot
Image frame
Center of Robot
Pick/placeElevation
Pick/place elevation is the distance, in negative z-direction relative to the tool, from where the robot approaches the item target.
Pick/place-
Time
Pick/place time is the time the robot is in the pick/place position. If the conveyor is moving during the pick/place time, the robot will track along the conveyor to keep the relative position on the moving conveyor.
VacuumActivation
Vacuum activation is the time in seconds before the middle of the corner path of the approaching position, when the vacuum I/O should be set. If a negative value is entered, the vacuum I/O will be set the time after the middle of the corner path. This value is only valid for work areas of type Pick or Other .
Note
Vacuum activation does not affect the picking of items in simulation. Items are attached to the picking tool using SimAttach events, for example, in the Pick Routine.
VacuumReversion
Vacuum reversion is the time in seconds before the half place time in the place position, when the blow I/O should be set. If a negative value is entered, the blow I/O will be set the time after the half place time in the place position. This value is only valid for work areas of type Place or Other .
Note
Vacuum reversion does not affect the placing of items in simulation. Items are detached from the picking tool using SimDetach events, for example, in the Place Routine.
Continues on next page
166 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued
VacuumOff
Description
Vacuum off is the time in seconds after the half place time in the place position, when the blow
I/O should be reset. If a negative value is entered, the blow I/O will be reset the time before the half place time in the place position. This value is only valid for work areas of type Place or Other .
Note
Vacuum Off does not affect the placing of items in simulation. Items are detached from the picking tool using SimDetach events, for example, in the Place Routine.
Tuning the robot
Limitations xx1900000596
Speed
Description
Allows you to tune the speed of the selected robot.
The robot settings can be tuned when a production is running, using the Tuning the robot window.
All tunings, including robot tuning, item tuning, and work area tuning, are only valid while the simulation or production is running.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
167
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued
Sync to recipe
Once the tuning value is modified, clicking Sync to recipe button allows you to sync the value in the tuning into the recipe. Otherwise the data will not be saved to the recipe.
xx1900000685
Continues on next page
168 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Flow Control
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued
Simulation xx1900000597
Recipe Status
Conveyors
Description
Allows you to control the status of the production.
Allows you to adjust the speed of the conveyor.
On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Simulation .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
169
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.2.12 Simulation
Continued
Use this procedure to do the simulation:
1 Click to choose one recipe from the tree view browser.
170 xx1900000590
2 Click Start on the ribbon-tab. Then it will start the simulation of created solution.
xx1900000586
The simulation runs automatically.
3 Click Stop on the ribbon-tab. Then it will stop the simulation.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
4.3 Configuration in real Runtime (RRT)
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
Switch Runtime
Note
After install PickMaster Twin Client and PickMaster Twin Host on different PC as recommended, there will be two real Runtime available but only the one connected to controller or camera should be used. This is the one that user should connect PickMaster PowerPac with and login.
The real Runtime on Host PC and Client PC are identical but the one on Host is for production. Robot controllers and cameras should also be connected to this one.
Right-click on RunTime to switch to the Runtime from Virtual Runtime .
Click Start Local RRT to start the RunTime on the computer. Select Connect to
RRT , the Sign in window is displayed. The following figure and table provide more details about the window.
xx1800001387 xx1800001388
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
171
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
Continued
IP Address
Description
Allows you to locate the IP address of the Runtime computer.
Note
It's not allowed to use any of the following IP addresses which are allocated for other functions:
• 192.168.127.0 - 255
The IP address cannot be on a subnet which overlaps with any of the above reserved IP addresses. If a subnet mask in the class B range has to be used, then a private address of class B must be used to avoid any overlapping. Contact your local network administrator regarding network overlapping.
See the section Communication in Technical reference manual - System parameters .
Runtime Account
UserName Allows you to enter the user name of your account in the Runtime.
Password Allows you to enter the password of your account in the Runtime.
Enter your PC admin user name and password
UserName
Password
Allows you to enter the user name of the administrator account for the computer which the Runtime is installed.
Allows you to enter the password of the administrator account for the computer which the Runtime is installed.
A default user and password have been created for each role.
Administrator Username: admin with Password: password
Technicist Username: superuser with Password:
ABB1998
Operator Username: operator with Password: password
Note
The Username and Password are case sensitive.
Note
If the solution will be used in the PickMaster PowerPac, it must have been connected to a real controller with the same configuration on PickMaster
PowerPac.
Continues on next page
172 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Procedure
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
Continued
To connect to Runtime.
1 Right-click the RunTime in the tree view Cell and select Start Local RRT .
xx1800001387
2 Right-click the RunTime in the tree view Cell and select Connect to RRT .
xx2000000314
The Sign in window is opened.
xx1800001388
3 In the Sign in dialog, enter the correct information.
Note
A default admin user, with full access, is provided with the following credentials:
• User: admin
• Password: password
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
173
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
Continued
4 Click OK .
Tip
If switch failed, the status window will show up.
The Status window is opened.
xx1800001462
Note
If the user meets any problem when building connection between PickMaster
PowerPac and real Runtime, please check from below possible reasons:
1 Using a host account that is not administrator;
2 Firewall blocking;
3 VPN interference;
4 SSH not installed or down or stuck (Occasionally due to computer environment the SSH.exe cannot be installed successfully);
5 Host IP address incorrect, or not in the same IP segment as the client port.
Select a real controller
Use this procedure to select a real controller:
1 Right-click the Controller in the tree view Cell and select Edit Controller .
xx1800001712
Continues on next page
174 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
Continued
The Edit Controller dialog is opened.
xx1800001713
2 Click on the Select Real Controller icon to open the Select Real Controller dialog.
Note
User must modify the firewall settings before selecting a real controller in
PickMaster PowerPac.
For WAN port, under Configuration/Communication/Firewall Manager, the following functions must be enabled.
"syslog" -EnableOnPublicNet
"Bonjour" -EnableOnPublicNet
"RobICI" -EnableOnPublicNet
"EtherNetIP" -EnableOnPublicNet
"RapidSockets" -EnableOnPublicNet
"RobotWebServices" -EnableOnPublicNet
"IEEE1588" -EnableOnPublicNet
"Netscan" -EnableOnPublicNet
"RobAPI" -EnableOnPublicNet
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
175
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
Continued
Note
Make sure that the setting 'Allow connection to controller from RobotStudio on public network' is enabled.
xx2100000506 xx1800001714
Continues on next page
176 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
Continued
The Select Real Controller dialog is opened.
xx1800001715
3 In the dialog box, choose the real controller to be connected.
4 Click OK to apply the configuration.
5 Click Close to close the Edit Controller dialog.
Configuring the I/O
I/O signals
I/O signals are configured using RobotStudio or the FlexPendant. Then they can be used from Runtime.
The predefined signals can be used without modifications. Edit the predefined signals or add additional signals if needed.
Note
The maximum name length for a work area signal is 15 characters.
Predefined I/O signals
The following I/O signals are predefined on delivery. Some of them are used or referenced to when configuring the line. The encoder signals are described in
Application manual - Conveyor tracking .
I/O signal name diX_1 doStartCnvX doTrigVisX doManSyncX
Description
Digital input signals for custom use, such as generating I/O triggered position or checking a gripper pressure switch.
Digital output for starting/stopping conveyors.
Digital output for triggering an image acquisition. This signal is used by Runtime to order the camera to acquire an image.
Digital output used for triggering predefined positions in a conveyor work area. This output should be connected to the
StartSig (input 9) on the corresponding encoder board.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
177
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
Continued
I/O signal name doVacuumX doBlowX goVacBlowX
Description
Digital output for activating vacuum. For example, for gripping a product. The output signal is set when an item shall be attached to the tool.
Note
The signal is controlled from the RAPID program. In simulation, the RAPID triggdata SimAttachX controls when the signal is set. On a real robot, the RAPID triggdata VacuumActX controls when the signal is set.
Digital output for activating air blow. For example, for releasing a product gripped by the robot. The output signal is set when an item shall be detached from the tool.
Note
The Release signal is controlled from the RAPID program. In simulation, the RAPID triggdata SimDetachX controls when the signal is set. On a real robot, the RAPID triggdatas
VacuumRevX and VacuumOffX controls when the signal is set/pulsed.
Digital I/O group containing doVacuumX and doBlowX .
Modify I/O signals in work area
Use this procedure to create a ghost picking flow:
1 Right-click on Conveyor WA 1 in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
xx1800001733
Continues on next page
178 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
Continued
The Recipe setting window is opened.
xx1800001734
2 Select the Customized Settings in the Signal Type tab.
xx1800001735
3 Enter the required data into the I/O signal setting table.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
179
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.1 Switching to real Runtime
Continued
For example: xx1800001736
4 Click OK to close the Recipe setting window.
5 Repeat step1 - 4 to the other Conveyor WA .
180 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.2 Configuring camera
4.3.2 Configuring camera
Introduction
Note
If any firewall or antivirus software is installed, add pickmasteru.exe
, sshd.exe
, and visionclient. exe to the white list.
Otherwise the PickMaster PowerPac cannot connect Runtime and the vision function cannot work normally.
Cameras together with vision models are used to locate objects in a specific area.
When a camera is created in the tree view, it is not connected to any physical camera. This must be done manually in the camera configuration dialog box. The camera in the tree view is configured to use one specific physical camera. The camera should also be configured to give an optimal image.
To configure a camera.
1 Right-click the camera in the tree view Cell and select Configuration .
xx1800001463
The Camera Configuration dialog and the Image dialog are opened.
xx1800001464
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
181
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.2 Configuring camera
Continued
2 In the Imaging device list, select the Gigabit Ethernet camera to which the camera is connected.
xx1800001465
3 In the Video format list, select the type of the connected camera.
xx1900000645
The image in Image dialog shows up.
Continues on next page
182 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.2 Configuring camera
Continued xx1800001466
4 If the camera should strobe when it is not in production mode, select the
Enable strobe offline checkbox. This is necessary if, for example, the camera is used together with a strobe light. This setting applies only to Gigabit
Ethernet cameras.
5 If the selected camera is a color camera and will be used together with the color video format, it is necessary to calibrate the white balance of the camera using this procedure: a Put a white sheet of paper under the camera. The sheet must cover the entire field of view.
b Adjust the light settings so that the image looks medium gray. Use either the camera aperture or the exposure time.
c In the White balance part, click Calculate . This will calculate the white balance calibration parameters.
d Click Apply . This will modify the camera’s internal settings.
e Click Save on camera . This will store the settings in the camera.
For more information about color vision, see
Using color vision on page 289 .
6 If needed, adjust Exposure , Brightness , and Contrast and click Apply in the Camera settings part.
Adjust the exposure to achieve the best image possible. The exposure together with the camera aperture defines the focus depth and possible motion blur. These two parameters must be suitably adjusted depending on the type of objects to look for and the speed of the conveyor.
Continues on next page
183 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.2 Configuring camera
Continued
Brightness and contrast can be changed to give an optimal image. Some objects might be easier to find by adjusting the ambient lighting together with the brightness and contrast parameters.
The effect of changing these parameter values is not seen until clicking
Apply .
7 Click OK .
Related information
Using color vision on page 289 .
Calibrating camera on page 234 .
184 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.3 Calibrating robot
4.3.3 Calibrating robot
Instruction
Detailed information about how to calibrating the robot are described in the robot product manual.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
185
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4 Calibrating linear conveyor
4.3.4 Calibrating linear conveyor
Overview
Note
The following calibration process is required when running production and emulation. Calibration under the simulation tab in PickMaster PowerPac will not complete the following calibration process.
The calibrations needed for the conveyors are camera and work area calibrations.
The work area calibration is a base frame calibration for conveyor work areas and a work object definition for indexed work areas. The key concept is to define a coordinate system origin that is the same for a camera and a robot base frame or work object.
Each camera must be calibrated separately. The base frame calibration is needed whenever conveyor systems are used.
The camera calibration is stored in the solution so all recipe in that solution could share the same calibration. If you need to re-calibrate a camera, all recipes in the solution will be updated with the new calibration.
The camera calibration and the work area calibration can be performed independently of each other, but it is very hard to make an accurate new camera calibration after the work area is calibrated.
The work area calibration is stored in the robot controller.
To calibrate the linear conveyor:
1 Define the parameter Counts Per Meter (for conveyors only), see
Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 377) on page 187 ,
Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000) on page 189
.
2 Calibrate the camera, see
Defining the base frame (IRC5) on page 191 ,
Defining the base frame (OmniCore) on page 194
.
Continues on next page
186 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.1 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 377)
4.3.4.1 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 377)
Introduction
The Counts Per Meter system parameter is used to calibrate the conveyor encoder.
The Counts Per Meter system parameter belongs to the type DeviceNet Command , in the topic I/O System .
xx1900000551
Calculation for Counts Per Meter
The value for the Counts Per Meter system parameter is calculated as follows:
(position1*old_counts_per_meter)/measured_meters
Value position1 old_counts_per_meter
Description
The conveyor position after moving.
Read from FlexPendant Jogging window.
The encoder’s old value.
measured_meters
Note
The encoders delivered from factory have a preset value.
For an IRC5 system this value is 20,000. This value can be used to start the calibration with.
The manually measured distance in meters that the conveyor has been moved.
Defining Counts Per Meter
Use the following procedure to define Counts Per Meter for the conveyor encoder.
1 Put a mark on the conveyor belt, for example draw a line or attach a piece of tape, and a mark on the side of the conveyor at the same location.
2 In the FlexPendant Program Editor , load and run the program ppacal.prg.
This sets the current position of the conveyor to zero. The value is shown as CNV value in the Position part of the FlexPendant Jogging window.
3 Run the conveyor belt approximately 1 meter.
4 In the FlexPendant Jogging window, read the position of the conveyor. This is position1 .
5 Measure the physical distance between the two marks. This is the value measured_meters
.
6 Calculate Counts Per Meter using the read and measured values.
For example: (1010*20000)/1005 = 20099
Continues on next page
187 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.1 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 377)
Continued
7 In RobotStudio, click Configuration and select topic I/O System and type
DeviceNet Command .
8 Select the unit Qtrackx (where x is the number of the conveyor) and update the value for parameter Counts Per Meter .
9 Tap OK .
10 Restart the controller.
Related information
Application manual - Conveyor tracking .
Technical reference manual - System parameters .
188 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.2 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000)
4.3.4.2 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000)
Introduction
The Counts Per Meter system parameter is used to calibrate the conveyor encoder.
The Counts Per Meter system parameter belongs to the type Conveyor Ici , in the topic Process .
xx2100000042
Calculation for Counts Per Meter
The value for the Counts Per Meter system parameter is calculated as follows: counts value/measured_meters
Value counts value measured_meters
Description
The conveyor position after moving.
For DSQC 2000: Read from predefined I/O signal on the
FlexPendant or RobotStudio. For example, CNV1, the signal name is c1counts.
The manually measured distance in meters that the conveyor has been moved.
Defining Counts Per Meter
Use the following procedure to define Counts Per Meter for the conveyor encoder.
1 Put a mark on the conveyor belt, for example draw a line or attach a piece of tape, and a mark on the side of the conveyor at the same location.
2 In the FlexPendant Program Editor , load and run the program ppacal.prg.
This sets the current position of the conveyor to zero. The value is shown as CNV value in the Position part of the FlexPendant Jogging window.
3 Run the conveyor belt approximately 1 meter.
4 In the FlexPendant Jogging window, read the position of the conveyor. This is position1 .
5 Measure the physical distance between the two marks. This is the value measured_meters .
Continues on next page
189 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.2 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000)
Continued
6 Calculate Counts Per Meter using the read and measured values.
For example: 20200000/1005 = 20099
7 In RobotStudio, click Configuration and select topic Process and type
Conveyor Ici .
8 Edit the unit ICIx (where x is the number of the conveyor) and update the value for parameter Counts Per Meter .
9 Tap OK .
10 Restart the controller.
Related information
Application manual - Conveyor tracking .
Technical reference manual - System parameters .
190 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5)
4.3.4.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5)
Introduction
For each conveyor work area on a conveyor, a conveyor base frame calibration must be performed. The base frame calibration gives a reference point for the robot when a picking or placing sensor detects objects at the work area.
Preparations
• Define the Counts Per Meter system parameter for each conveyor work area. For more details, see
Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC
Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000) on page 189 .
• Prepare a calibration tool that can be mounted temporarily on the robots.
The calibration tool shall have a pointed TCP. Measure the TCP offset accurately.
• Create a tooldata for the calibration tool in the rapid program for each robot.
Update the TCP offset with the measured values. In the FlexPendant Jogging
Window , select the tooldata for the robot.
• If a camera is used, calibrate the camera, see
Calibrating camera on page 234 .
After calibrating the camera, keep the camera calibration pattern attached to the conveyor.
Procedure
Use the following procedure to calibrate all the base frames for a conveyor in the line with IRC5 controller:
1 Make sure the reference point for calibration is marked accurately on the conveyor belt.
• If a camera is used, the reference point is the local origin of the camera view. If the camera has been just calibrated, the reference point is already marked by the origin of the camera calibration pattern that is attached to the conveyor.
• If an I/O sensor is used to generate predefined positions, the reference point should be marked on the conveyor at the point where the objects are detected by the sensor. This point becomes the local origin of the detected items or containers.
2 Reset the conveyor (encoder board) positions.
Note
Do not move the conveyor until this step is completely finished.
Do the following for all the robots having work areas that needs to be calibrated along the conveyor:
• In the FlexPendant Program Editor , load the program ppacal.prg
(DSQC 377)/ PrepareCalib.prg
(DSQC 2000 ). If the robot is a MultiMove robot, load ppacal.prg
(DSQC 377)/
Continues on next page
191 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5)
Continued
PrepareCalib.prg
(DSQC 2000 ) for this robot task (for example,
T_ROB1 ), and select only this task for execution.
• Start the loaded rapid program
Select calibration type: Conveyor.
Select conveyor: for example, CNV1.
Wait for the message READY FOR CALIB . The conveyor position in the jogging window for CNV1 should now be displayed as “0” mm.
3 Move the conveyor belt forward until the reference point is just inside the working range of the next robot to calibrate.
The conveyor positions for all the conveyor work areas, in the jogging window should indicate the same total travel distance for the reference point. The nearest robot to the camera or sensor is calibrated first, followed by the next nearest robot and so on until all the robots along the conveyor have been calibrated.
4 Mount the calibration tool on the robot.
5 Open the Calibration window on the FlexPendant.
6 Select the conveyor, for example, CNV1.
7 Tap Base Frame .
8 Tap 4 Point .
9 Select the robot, for example, T_ROB1 .
This step is required for MultiMove robots.
10 Select the first point Point 1 .
11 Jog or move the robot by hand. Point out the reference point on the conveyor accurately with the calibration tool TCP.
12 Modify the selected point ( Point 1 ) by tapping the Modify Position function key.
13 Move the conveyor belt forward a distance where the reference point still can be reached by the robot.
Long and equally spaced distances between the four calibration points (Point
1-4) are preferred since this increases the accuracy of the calibration.
14 Repeat the steps 10-13 for the points Point 2 , Point 3 , and Point 4 .
15 Tap OK to calculate the base frame.
16 Check if the displayed mean error and max error of the base frame calculation is acceptable. If the estimated error is acceptable, tap OK to confirm and store the new base frame.
Note
A mean error of less than 1 mm is acceptable in most cases.
Continues on next page
192 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5)
Continued
If the estimated error is not ok, this base frame must be re-calibrated:
• Move the conveyor belt backward until the reference point is just inside the working range of the robot. Repeat the steps 10-13 for all the points
Point1 , Point 2 , Point 3 , and Point 4 .
• If the conveyor belt cannot be moved backward, start over from step
1.
17 If there are more robots to calibrate along the conveyor, continue from step
3.
18 Restart the controllers to activate the new base frames.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
193
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Introduction
For each conveyor work area on a conveyor, a conveyor base frame calibration must be performed. The base frame calibration gives a reference point for the robot when a picking or placing sensor detects objects at the work area.
Preparations
• Define the Counts Per Meter system parameter for each conveyor work area. For more details, see
Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC
Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000) on page 189 .
• Prepare a calibration tool that can be mounted temporarily on the robots.
The calibration tool shall have a pointed TCP. Measure the TCP offset accurately.
• Create a tooldata for the calibration tool in the rapid program for each robot.
Update the TCP offset with the measured values. In the FlexPendant Jogging
Window , select the tooldata for the robot.
• If a camera is used, calibrate the camera, see
Calibrating camera on page 234 .
After calibrating the camera, keep the camera calibration pattern attached to the conveyor.
Procedure
Use the following procedure to calibrate all the base frames for a conveyor in the line with OmniCore controller:
1 Make sure the reference point for calibration is marked accurately on the conveyor belt.
• If a camera is used, the reference point is the local origin of the camera view. If the camera has been just calibrated, the reference point is already marked by the origin of the camera calibration pattern that is attached to the conveyor.
• If an I/O sensor is used to generate predefined positions, the reference point should be marked on the conveyor at the point where the objects are detected by the sensor. This point becomes the local origin of the detected items or containers.
2 Reset the conveyor (encoder board) positions.
Note
Do not move the conveyor until this step is completely finished.
Continues on next page
194 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued
Do the following for all the robots having work areas that needs to be calibrated along the conveyor:
• In the FlexPendant, click Calibrate .
xx2100000362
• Click Option Tab on the up left corner.
xx2100000363
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
195
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued
• Click Service Routines .
xx2100000364
• Click PrepareCalibration .
xx2100000365
Continues on next page
196 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued
• Click Yes in the popped up dialog.
xx2100000366 xx2100000367
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
197
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued
• Set the controller to Manual mode.
xx2100000368
• Enable the Thumb button to motors on the controller.
xx2100000369
Continues on next page
198 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
• Click Play .
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued xx2100000370
• Select the work area type Linear Conveyor .
xx2100000371
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
199
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued
• Select conveyor: for example, CNV1. Then click OK xx2100000372
• Wait for the message ...is prepared for calibration . The conveyor position in the jogging window for CNV1 should now be displayed as
“0” mm.
Continues on next page
200 xx2100000395
3 Move the conveyor belt forward until the reference point is just inside the working range of the next robot to calibrate.
The conveyor positions for all the conveyor work areas, in the jogging window should indicate the same total travel distance for the reference point. The
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued nearest robot to the camera or sensor is calibrated first, followed by the next nearest robot and so on until all the robots along the conveyor have been calibrated.
4 Mount the calibration tool on the robot.
5 Open the Calibration window in Calibrate on the FlexPendant.
xx2100000373
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
201
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued
6 Select the conveyor, for example, CNV1.
xx2100000374
7 Tap Define Base Frame .
xx2100000375
Continues on next page
202 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
8 Tap 4 Point and click Next .
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued xx2100000376
9 Select the robot, for example, T_ROB1 .
This step is required for MultiMove robots.
10 Select the first point Point 1 .
11 Jog or move the robot by hand. Point out the reference point on the conveyor accurately with the calibration tool TCP.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
203
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued
12 Modify the selected point ( Point 1 ) by tapping the Modify Position function key.
xx2100000377
13 Move the conveyor belt forward a distance where the reference point still can be reached by the robot.
Long and equally spaced distances between the four calibration points (Point
1-4) are preferred since this increases the accuracy of the calibration.
14 Repeat the steps 10-13 for the points Point 2 , Point 3 , and Point 4 .
Continues on next page
204 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued
15 Tap Next to calculate the base frame.
xx2100000378
16 Check if the displayed mean error and max error of the base frame calculation is acceptable. If the estimated error is acceptable, tap Finish to confirm and store the new base frame.
Note
A mean error of less than 1 mm is acceptable in most cases.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
205
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.4.4 Defining the base frame (OmniCore)
Continued xx2100000379
If the estimated error is not ok, this base frame must be re-calibrated:
• Move the conveyor belt backward until the reference point is just inside the working range of the robot. Repeat the steps 10-13 for all the points
Point1 , Point 2 , Point 3 , and Point 4 .
• If the conveyor belt cannot be moved backward, start over from step
1.
17 If there are more robots to calibrate along the conveyor, continue from step
3.
18 Restart the controllers to activate the new base frames.
206 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5 Calibrating circular conveyor
4.3.5 Calibrating circular conveyor
Overview
Note
The following calibration process is required when running production and emulation. Calibration under the simulation tab in PickMaster PowerPac will not complete the following calibration process.
The calibrations needed for the circular conveyors are camera and work area calibrations. The work area calibration is a base frame calibration for conveyor work areas and a work object definition for indexed work areas. The key concept is to define a coordinate system origin that is the same for a camera and a robot base frame or work object.
Each camera must be calibrated separately. The base frame calibration is needed whenever conveyor systems are used.
The camera calibration is stored in the solution so all recipe in that solution could share the same calibration. If you need to re-calibrate a camera, all recipes in the solution will be updated with the new calibration.
The camera calibration and the work area calibration can be performed independently of each other, but it is very hard to make an accurate new camera calibration after the work area is calibrated.
The work area calibration is stored in the robot controller.
To calibrate the circular conveyor:
1 Define the parameter Counts Per Meter (for conveyors only), see
Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 377) on page 208 ,
Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000) on page 210
.
Note
In the circular conveyor, the parameter Counts Per Meter indicates counts per radian.
2 Define the base frame, see
Defining the base frame (IRC5) on page 212
.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
207
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5.1 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 377)
4.3.5.1 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 377)
Introduction
The Counts Per Meter system parameter is used to calibrate the conveyor encoder.
The Counts Per Meter system parameter belongs to the type DeviceNet Command , in the topic I/O System .
xx1900000551
Calculation for Counts Per Meter
The value for the Counts Per Meter system parameter is calculated as follows:
(position1*old_counts_per_meter)/measured_radians
Value position1 old_counts_per_meter
Description
Read from FlexPendant Jogging window.
The encoder’s old value.
measured_radians
Note
The encoders delivered from factory have a preset value.
For an IRC5 system this value is 20,000. This value can be used to start the calibration with.
The manually measured radians that the conveyor has been moved.
Defining Counts Per Meter
Use the following procedure to define Counts Per Meter for the conveyor encoder.
1 Put a mark on the conveyor belt, for example draw a line or attach a piece of tape, and a mark on the side of the conveyor at the same location.
2 In the FlexPendant Program Editor , load and run the program ppacal.prg.
This sets the current position of the conveyor to zero. The value is shown as CNV value in the Position part of the FlexPendant Jogging window.
3 Rotate the conveyor belt approximately 180 degrees.
4 In the FlexPendant Jogging window, read the position of the conveyor. This is position1 .
5 Measure the physical radians between the two marks. This is the value measured_radians .
6 Calculate Counts Per Meter using the read and measured values.
For example: (1.5*20000)/0.5 = 60000
When this variable is applied to a circular conveyor, the actual meaning is counts per radian .
Continues on next page
208 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5.1 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 377)
Continued
7 In RobotStudio, click Configuration and select topic I/O System and type
DeviceNet Command .
8 Select the unit Qtrackx (where x is the number of the conveyor) and update the value for parameter Counts Per Meter .
9 Tap OK .
10 Restart the controller.
Related information
Application manual - Conveyor tracking .
Technical reference manual - System parameters .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
209
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5.2 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000)
4.3.5.2 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000)
Introduction
The Counts Per Meter system parameter is used to calibrate the conveyor encoder.
The Counts Per Meter system parameter belongs to the type Conveyor Ici , in the topic Process .
xx2100000042
Calculation for Counts Per Meter
The value for the Counts Per Meter system parameter is calculated as follows: counts value/measured_radians
Value position1/counts value old_counts_per_meter
Description
Read from predefined I/O signal on the FlexPendant or
RobotStudio. For example, CNV1, the signal name is c1counts.
The encoder’s old value.
measured_radians
Note
The encoders delivered from factory have a preset value.
For an IRC5 system this value is 20,000. This value can be used to start the calibration with.
The manually measured radians that the conveyor has been moved.
Defining Counts Per Meter
Use the following procedure to define Counts Per Meter for the conveyor encoder.
1 Put a mark on the conveyor belt, for example draw a line or attach a piece of tape, and a mark on the side of the conveyor at the same location.
2 Hot start it to set the current position of the conveyor to zero.
When this variable is applied to a circular conveyor, the actual meaning is counts per radian .
Continues on next page
210 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5.2 Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000)
Continued
This sets the current position of the conveyor to zero. The value is shown as CNV value in the Position part of the FlexPendant Jogging window.
3 Rotate the conveyor belt approximately 180 degrees.
4 In the FlexPendant Jogging window, read the position of the conveyor. This is position1
.
5 Measure the physical radians between the two marks. This is the value measured_radians .
6 Calculate Counts Per Meter using the read and measured values.
For example: 30000/0.5 = 60000
7 In RobotStudio, click Configuration and select topic Process and type
Conveyor Ici .
8 Edit the unit ICIx (where x is the number of the conveyor) and update the value for parameter Counts Per Meter .
9 Tap OK .
10 Restart the controller.
Related information
Application manual - Conveyor tracking .
Technical reference manual - System parameters .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
211
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5)
4.3.5.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5)
Introduction
For each conveyor work area on a circular conveyor, a conveyor base frame calibration must be performed. The base frame calibration gives a reference point for the robot when a picking or placing sensor detects objects at the work area.
xx1900000592
Preparations
• Define the Counts Per Meter system parameter for each conveyor work area. For more details, see
Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC
Defining the parameter Counts Per Meter (DSQC 2000) on page 210 .
• Prepare a calibration tool that can be mounted temporarily on the robots.
The calibration tool shall have a pointed TCP. Measure the TCP offset accurately.
• Create a tooldata for the calibration tool in the rapid program for each robot.
Update the TCP offset with the measured values. In the FlexPendant Jogging
Window , select the tooldata for the robot.
• If a camera is used, calibrate the camera, see
Calibrating camera on page 234 .
After calibrating the camera, keep the camera calibration pattern attached to the conveyor.
Recommendation
This section describes how to use TCP measurements and RAPID programs to calculate the conveyor base frame position and quaternion for a circular conveyor.
This method uses three measured points on the circular conveyor to calculate the center of rotation. The three points should be spaced as far apart as possible around the periphery.
Continues on next page
212 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5)
Continued
Defining the base frame orientation and start window start calibration
The base frame quaternion defines where the 0.0 rad point is for the robot motion.
The following figure shows an example of the angles that are used when defining the base frame orientation for the circular conveyor.
R p_centre , X, Y
P
θ
Base
θ p_0 , X_0, Y_0
TP
θ
S
Q
θ
0.0 rad
X
IRB
Y
IRB
IRB xx1200001103
R
S
Q
θ
TP
θ
P
θ
Base
θ
Direction of rotation
Synchronization switch
Queue tracking distance angle
Angle shown on FlexPendant
Angle calculated from p_0 position
Base frame angle to be converted to a quaternion
Calculating the x and y positions for the base frame
Use this procedure to calculate the x and y positions for the base frame.
1 Use Wobj0 on the FlexPendant. Pick out a reference point on the circular conveyor, jog the TCP to this point and record p_0 .
2 Run the conveyor to another position. Jog the TCP to the reference point and record p_1 .
3 Run the conveyor to a third position, jog the TCP to the reference point and record p_2 .
4 Use the function CNVUTL_cirCntr with the points p_0 , p_1 , and p_2 , to calculate the center of the circle, p_centre .
The system module cnv_utl.sys
can be found in Robotware.
Continues on next page
213 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5)
Continued
5 Take the x and y values from p_centre and enter them into the base frame values for the conveyor, converting to meters, see Application manual - Conveyor tracking . The z value will be entered later, once the work object zero position has been chosen.
Calculating the quaternion
Use this procedure to calculate the quaternion for the base frame orientation.
xx1900000678
1 With the recorded angle in step 5 when calculating the x and y positions for the base frame. This is angle , see example measurement points in
Defining the base frame orientation and start window start calibration on page 213 .
2 Calculate P from the
XP1 and YP1 coordinates of P0 and the atan function.
If the point is at first quartile or frouth quartile: Pθ = arctan(YP1/XP1)
Continues on next page
214 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5.3 Defining the base frame (IRC5)
Continued
If the point is at second quartile or third quartile: Pθ = π + arctan(YP1/XP1)
Tip
If the calculation tool provide the arctan2 function, there is no need to judge the quartile and use Pθ = arctan2 (XP1, YP1) directly.
3 Calculate the value of Base.
4 Calculate the quaternion for the base frame taking into account the direction of rotation:
Counter clockwise rotation: q1 = cos(Base /2) q2 = 0.0
q3 = 0.0
q4 = sin(Base /2)
Clockwise rotation: q1 = 0.0
q2 = cos(Base /2) q3 = –sin(Base /2) q4 = 0.0
5 Enter the value for z (in meters) from p_0 , and the values for the quaternions, q1 , q2 , q3 , and q4 , into the base frame for the conveyor.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
215
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5.4 Type configuration for circular conveyor
4.3.5.4 Type configuration for circular conveyor
Introduction
For each conveyor work area on a circular conveyor, the type parameters,
Sensor offset , Mechanics and Rotating Move , must be set.
Sensor offset defines the distance between the sensor and the conveyor base frame original point. For example, when using a camera, this parameter represents the distance of the projection point of the camera on the conveyor belt from the center of the circle.
Note
The distance for Sensor offset is measured manually.
xx2100000066
Mechanics defines the moving trajectory of the conveyor. The default value is
EXT_LIN (linear conveyor). So when the circular conveyor is used, this parameter must be set as
EXT_ROT
.
xx2100000067
Continues on next page
216 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.5.4 Type configuration for circular conveyor
Continued
Rotating Move defines the conveyor's rotating status. The default value is
No
(linear conveyor). So when the circular conveyor is used, this parameter must be set as Yes .
xx2100000068
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
217
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Introduction
For indexed work areas a work object calibration must be performed. The work object calibration gives a reference point for the robot when picking or placing sensor detected objects at the work area.
Preparations for calibrating the indexed work area
• Prepare a calibration tool that can be mounted temporarily on the robot. The calibration tool shall have a pointed TCP. Measure the TCP offset accurately.
• Create a tooldata for the calibration tool in the rapid program for the robot.
Update the TCP offset with the measured values. In the FlexPendant Jogging
Window, select the tooldata for the robot.
• Calibrate the camera, see
Calibrating camera on page 234
. After calibrating the camera, keep the camera calibration pattern attached to the conveyor.
• Make sure the reference x- and y-axes for work object calibration is marked accurately on the indexed work area. Three reference points are needed for the calibration: two points on the x-axis and one point on the y-axis.
If a camera is used, the reference x- and y-axes should be marked with respect to the local origin of the camera view. If the camera just has been calibrated, the local origin is marked by the camera calibration pattern attached to the indexed work area.
If a position generator I/O signal is used to generate predefined positions, the reference x- and y-axes should be marked at the desired location for the local origin where items or containers are to be generated.
xx1400002201
Continues on next page
218 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
Procedure(IRC5)
1 Select the work object to be calibrated.
• In the FlexPendant Program Editor , load the program ppacal.prg
(DSQC 377)/ PrepareCalib.prg
(DSQC 2000 ). If the robot is a MultiMove robot, load ppacal.prg
(DSQC 377)/
PrepareCalib.prg
(DSQC 2000 ) for this robot task (for example,
T_ROB1
), and select only this task for execution.
• Start the loaded rapid program
Select calibration type: Fixed/Indexed.
Select work object: For example, IdxWobj1 .
Wait for the message DEFINE CURRENT WORKOBJECT .
Note
Do not move the program pointer until the calibration has been completed. Otherwise, the calibration is not properly saved.
2 In the FlexPendant Jogging window, tap and select Workobject . Then tap
Edit and select Define .
3 Select Object method : No Change. Select User method: 3 points.
4 Select User Point X 1 . Point out a point on the x-axis close to the origin with the robot's TCP. Press Modify Position.
5 Select User Point X 2 . Move the TCP a distance in the direction the x-axis.
Point out a point on the x-axis with the robot's TCP. Press Modify Position.
6 Select User Point Y 1 . Point out a point on the positive y-axis with the robot's
TCP. Press Modify Position.
7 Tap OK .
8 Restart the RAPID program (without moving the PP) to save the selected work object definition.
The definition is saved in the rapid data array
NonCnvWOData located in the ppaUser system module.
Procedure(OmniCore)
1 Make sure the reference point for calibration is marked accurately on the conveyor belt.
• If a camera is used, the reference point is the local origin of the camera view. If the camera has been just calibrated, the reference point is already marked by the origin of the camera calibration pattern that is attached to the conveyor.
• If an I/O sensor is used to generate predefined positions, the reference point should be marked on the conveyor at the point where the objects are detected by the sensor. This point becomes the local origin of the detected items or containers.
Continues on next page
219 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
2 Reset the conveyor (encoder board) positions.
Note
Do not move the conveyor until this step is completely finished.
Do the following for all the robots having work areas that needs to be calibrated along the conveyor:
• In the FlexPendant, click Calibrate .
xx2100000362
Continues on next page
220 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
• Click Option Tab on the up left corner.
xx2100000363
• Click Service Routines .
xx2100000364
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
221
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
• Click PrepareCalibration .
xx2100000365
• Click Yes in the popped up dialog.
xx2100000366
Continues on next page
222 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued xx2100000367
• Set the controller to Manual mode.
xx2100000368
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
223
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
• Enable the Thumb button to motors on the controller.
xx2100000369
• Click Play .
xx2100000370
Continues on next page
224 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
• Select the work area type Stationary .
xx2100000396
• Select conveyor: for example, Idxwobj1. Then click OK xx2100000397
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
225
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
• Wait for the message ...is prepared for calibration . The conveyor position in the jogging window for CNV1 should now be displayed as
“0” mm.
xx2100000398
3 Select the Workobject in the Option Tab.
xx2100000380
Continues on next page
226 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
4 In the Workobject, tap on the ...
to select Define .
xx2100000381
5 In the Define User frame window, set the User Method as User defined with 3 points .
xx2100000382
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
227
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
6 Select X1 . Point out a location on the x-axis close to the origin with the robot's
TCP.
xx2100000383
7 Press Modify .
xx2100000384
Continues on next page
228
8 Select X2 . Move the TCP a distance in the direction the x-axis. Point out a location on the x-axis with the robot's TCP.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
9 Press Modify .
10 Select Y1 . Point out a location on the positive y-axis with the robot's TCP.
11 Press Modify .
12 Tap Next .
xx2100000385
13 In the Define Object frame window, tap Next .
xx2100000386
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
229
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
14 Check if the displayed mean error and max error of the user frame calculation is acceptable. If the estimated error is acceptable, tap Finish to confirm and store the new user frame.
xx2100000391
15 Click OK on the popped up dialog.
Continues on next page
230 xx2100000392
16 Enable the Thumb button to motors on the controller.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.6 Calibrating indexed work area
Continued
17 Click Play .
18 Click Yes on the question: Do you want to save this work object definition .
xx2100000393 xx2100000394
19 The definition is saved in the rapid data array NonCnvWOData located in the ppaUser system module.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
231
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.7 Verifying conveyor calibrations
4.3.7 Verifying conveyor calibrations
Introduction
The calibration is verified by using a calibration verification paper. The paper has a model that is taught and used as a bull’s eye for the robot to find. The same tool is used here as for the base frame calibration.
The file with the calibration verification paper is found in the PickMaster package.
To achieve a very good calibration, the camera calibration tune and the base frame calibration tune steps can be performed more than once. Each time the result should be closer to the optimal calibration.
Note
The calibration tuning should only be used for small errors. If the error is large then the line should be recalibrated.
Tuning the camera and base frame calibrations
Use this procedure to tune the camera and base frame calibrations.
1 Place the calibration verification paper on the conveyor under the camera.
The center column of object should be placed close to the center of the camera view. Align the paper with the conveyor as accurately as possible.
2 Use one of the objects on the calibration verification paper as model. See
Calibrating camera on page 234 .
3 Place the grip position in the center of the model.
4 Examine how the robot is placing the holes to adjust possible errors in the camera calibration or the base frame calibration.
xx0900000649
Continues on next page
232 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.7 Verifying conveyor calibrations
Continued
If the holes are rotated too much compared to the center of the objects, which affects the accuracy of the grasp, then recalibrate the cameras.
xx0900000650
If the holes are off center of the objects too much, which affects the accuracy of the grasp, then recalibrate the base frame of the conveyor.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
233
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8 Calibrating camera
4.3.8 Calibrating camera
Introduction
Overview
The camera calibration defines the origin for the coordinate system shared by the camera and the robot base frame or work object. If the camera is used with a conveyor work area the camera calibration must be performed before the base frame calibration because the camera calibration origin works as a common reference point for the two calibrations. When a camera calibration is done, the origin is saved and the user can graphically display this origin when the base frame calibration is performed.
Note
If any firewall or antivirus software is installed, add pickmasteru.exe
, sshd.exe
, and visionclient. exe to the white list.
Otherwise the PickMaster PowerPac cannot connect Runtime and the vision function cannot work normally.
Checkerboard calibration
The camera calibration method is called checkerboard calibration . The calibration is performed in two steps. First the whole image is analyzed and warped into a correct image and then the region of the resulting image is defined.
The algorithm uses the scale in the center of the image, which means that it makes all the tiles the same size as the tile at the center of the original image.
Multi-view calibration
The camera can be calibrated using one or several images. Multi-view calibration can compensate for parallax error.
The accuracy of the multi-view calibration increases with the number of input images. Use at least three images at different tilt angles and altitudes. Using multiple images of calibration plates in parallel planes does not increase accuracy.
Prerequisites
Camera calibration is done using calibration papers that you must print out. The calibration papers are found in the PickMaster package.
The printed image must have a high contrast and the paper must not be reflective
(high gloss). Verify with a ruler that the squares are proportional. If the square width or height differs from 10 mm, make a note of the actual measures.
The calibration paper must be adequately illuminated and free from shadows.
If a conveyor is used, the x-axis of the calibration paper must be aligned with the motion of the conveyor.
Calibrating the camera
The Camera Calibration dialog can be used to handle camera calibrations for the specified camera. Calibrations can be created, edited, imported, and exported.
Continues on next page
234 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8 Calibrating camera
Continued
Use this procedure to calibrate the camera.
1 Right-click the camera in the tree view Cell and select Calibration .
xx1800001467
The Camera Calibration window is opened.
xx1800001468
2 Select the default calibration from the list and click Edit .
The Camera Calibration Feature and Calibration dialog are opened.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
235
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8 Calibrating camera
Continued xx1800001469 xx1800001470
Continues on next page
236 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8 Calibrating camera
Continued
3 In the Settings part, adjust the grid pitch if the squares on the printed calibration paper differs from 10.0 mm. Enter an appropriate name for the calibration.
xx1800001701
Tip
Using precise measurements improves accuracy. A good way to get a more precise measurement of the grid pitch is to measure for example 10 tiles and calculate the average size.
4 In the Image part, click Live to get and show new images continuously, or click Acquire to get one new image. To use an image from file or save the current image, click Import or Export .
5 For single-view calibration: When the calibration plate is in position, acquire an image and click Set Origin in the Calibration images part. This stores the image and marks it as the origin image (the origin of this image will be the physical origin of the camera’s coordinate system).
xx1800001702
6 For multi-view calibration: When calibrating a camera with multiple images it is important that the origin image is still in place after finishing the camera calibration. This is because the origin image is used to define the coordinate system of the robot.
There are two ways of achieving this. One way is to acquire additional views first (click Acquire and Add ) and acquire the origin image last (click Acquire and Set origin ), leaving the calibration plate in the correct place for calibration of the work object/base frame.
The other way is to use two calibration plates with the exact same grid pitch.
Put one calibration plate in the position to represent the origin of the camera.
Acquire an image and click Set origin . Leave this plate in place while acquiring images of the second calibration plate at different angles and altitudes and click Add to save them to the list.
Continues on next page
237 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8 Calibrating camera
Continued
7 In the Calibration part, click Calibrate to start calibration.
The image is analyzed and calibration is performed with the specified parameters. A corrected image is shown together with an adjustable rectangle used to define the final image area. The calibration is not complete until the region is defined.
xx1800001703
8 Adjust the rectangle to the desired region and click Set Region to define the resulting image size.
The calibration is now completed and the result is displayed in the Calibration result part. See
Calibration result on page 239 .
9 If needed, click:
• Calib Image to show the original image used to calibrate the camera.
• Warp Live to show continuously acquired and corrected images.
• Warp Image to correct the current image.
10 If needed, click:
• Show features to show the checkerboard vertices used during the calibration. The features are only shown in the calibration images.
• Show origin to show the origin of the resulting coordinate system. The origin is only shown in corrected images.
11 Click OK .
Tip
Continues on next page
238
For conveyors, leave the calibration paper as it is until the base frame has been calibrated.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Calibration result
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8 Calibrating camera
Continued
Note
You can export or import camera calibrations. The exported file is stored in
.pmcalib
format. It is also possible to export images from the camera calibration window for storing the images used for a certain calibration.
xx1900000552
Result
Max residual
Average residual
Warp time
Image size
Camera view
Camera location
Description
The maximum residual error for the calibration.
The average residual error for the calibration.
The time required correcting an image. This time has to be considered when calculating the total time for the image analysis.
The resulting size in pixels of the corrected image
The resulting size of the camera view calculated with the new calibration.
The position of the camera in relation to the origin of the origin calibration plate.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
239
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8.1 Showing live images
4.3.8.1 Showing live images
Live images
It is possible to view images from each camera when a production is running.
Note
Showing Runtime images requires much processing power and should not be used for a long period of time if complex vision models are used.
Showing live images
To show images, click Production . The camera images are shown in the Vision tab.
The found objects are shown as green or blue crosses, depending on if they are marked as accepted or rejected by the vision model. See
.
240 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8.2 Detailed vision information
4.3.8.2 Detailed vision information
Detailed vision information
More detailed information than given by the live images is shown in the Detailed
Vision Information dialog. This dialog box keeps a buffer of images and information about the corresponding vision model hits.
Sequences of images can be record to the buffer and then analyzed individually.
While recording, images are saved in the buffer in a first in, first out basis and the latest image is shown in the dialog.
When clicking pause, images are no longer added and the images in the buffer can be analyzed. Save the images in the current buffer to file for later analysis with the Vision Analyzer program, see
One dialog can be opened for each vision defined position source (the name of the camera and the solution is shown in the title bar). You can continue working with the solution while the dialog is opened. Reduce the window size if the window is blocking other information.
The maximum size of the buffer depends on the RAM memory on the computer.
If several dialogs are opened at the same time and the maximum memory size is reached, you can reduce the buffer for one dialog to increase the buffer for another.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
241
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8.2 Detailed vision information
Continued
Illustration, Detailed Vision Information
Click Detailed Vision Information on the popup menu of a vision defined position source to open the dialog. By default, the recording state is activated and the buffer is set to 10 images.
xx1900000926
Image buffer
Display options
Used to switch between recording or pause and set the image buffer size. Click
Save to save all images in the buffer to a .pmv file.
Select which vision models to display, all together or individually, and other settings for what to show in the images. The settings are valid both for recording and pause.
Image information
Step through the image buffer when recording is paused. ALT + LEFT or RIGHT
ARROW can also be used to step. Click Export to save he current image to file
(.bmp format).
The list view at the bottom shows information about all the hits. When an individual model is selected, the columns change depending on its type.
The pan and zoom buttons can be used to analyze the image more closely.
Note
Only overlapping item regions in the same image are marked as overlapped but no robot will access items with regions that overlap with item regions in consecutive images.
Continues on next page
242 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8.2 Detailed vision information
Continued
Vision Analyzer
Image buffers recorded in the Detailed Vision Information dialog can be saved as .pmv files. These files can be viewed with a separate program called PickMaster
Vision Analyzer.
Start Vision Analyzer from the PickMaster Twin Client installation folder or from
Windows Start menu.
xx0800000342
Click Load to open a .pmv file.
Click Vision to see detailed information about the camera that took the images.
Other settings in Vision are identical to settings in Detailed Vision Information .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
243
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.8.3 The image windows
4.3.8.3 The image windows
The image windows
When configuring a camera or a vision model the camera image is shown in a separate window. The image window is resizable and provides tools to quickly zoom and pan the shown image. Some tools change the appearance of the mouse pointer.
To zoom using the keyboard and mouse, place the pointer over the image, press
CTRL and scroll the mouse wheel.
The current zoom level and the world coordinate of the mouse pointer is shown in the status bar. When live images are shown, the current frame rate is also shown in the status bar.
xx1800001469
244 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.1 Vision modeling
4.3.9 Adding vision model
4.3.9.1 Vision modeling
Introduction to vision modeling
There are three different tools available for generating models in a solution and the possibility to add customized external models. The three tools are:
• Geometric PatMax which is a pattern recognition tool. See
Configuring a geometric model with PatMax on page 246 .
• Blob which is a detection of two-dimensional shapes within images. See
Configuring blob models on page 257
.
• Inspection tool (Inspection II) which makes it possible to combine the PatMax , blob, histogram, Caliper, and external tool to generate a model. See
Configuring inspection models on page 264
.
Note
Vision modeling can only be created or edited when the software is connected to a real controller.
Classification of items
Items identified by vision models can be classified as either accepted or rejected.
These two types can be distributed to different work areas and be given different item type values accessible from the RAPID program. Item classification can be done by PatMax , Blob , and the Inspection tool .
Vision model parameters in item targets
Item targets identified by a vision model can store a selection of upto 5 vision model parameters in the components
Val1
,
Val2
,
Val3
,
Val4
, and
Val5
. These parameters can be accessed in user hooks and in the RAPID program.
Item targets identified by an inspection model can store a selection of parameters from the alignment model and from the included subinspection models.
For each kind of vision model, a target storage can be selected for some vision parameters.
External vision models
This function is reserved for next version.
Related information
Configuring a geometric model with PatMax on page 246 .
Configuring blob models on page 257 .
Configuring inspection models on page 264 .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
245
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Introduction to the geometric model PatMax
PatMax is a pattern location search technology. This tool measures:
• Position of the pattern.
• Size relative to the originally trained pattern.
• Angle relative to the originally trained pattern.
PatMax differs from other pattern location technologies as it is not based on pixel grid representations that cannot be efficiently and accurately rotated or scaled.
Instead, PatMax uses a feature based representation that can be transformed quickly and accurately for pattern matching.
When creating a pattern the following things should be considered.
• Select a representative pattern with consistent features. Reduce needless features and image noise. Train only important features. If necessary, export the image and use an external program to erase noise.
• Larger patterns will provide greater accuracy because they contain more boundary points to resolve at run-time.
• High frequency features are more significant at the outer edges of the pattern.
Models can be classified with the function Inspection I . A model can either be defined as accepted or rejected, see
.
To increase the contrast in images where parts have similar grayscale tone, it is possible to use color filtering. See
Using color vision on page 289
.
There are several parameters that can be adjusted to make an efficient model. The configuration is done in the PatMax Model Configuration dialog and the result is displayed in the PatMax Image and the PatMax Result dialogs:
Illustration PatMax Model Configuration xx1900000557
Continues on next page
246 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Continued xx1900000558 xx1900000559 xx1900000560
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
247
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Continued
Configuring a PatMax vision model
Use this procedure to configure a PatMax vision model.
1 Right-click on one Item in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
xx1800001704
The Item Setting window is opened.
xx1800001705
2 In the Item Source dialog, click Geometric .
The Image Dialog and Geometric dialog are opened.
Continues on next page
248 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Continued xx1800001706
3 In the Image under Model Definition , click Live , Acquire , or Import to get an image. Select the calibration that has set in the Camera Calibration from
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
249
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Continued the Calibration list. Select the Calibration grid checkbox to display help lines for the coordinate system.
xx1800001707
The help lines can be moved with the mouse to make it easier to train a pattern.
4 If color filtering should be used select the Color filter checkbox to enable the filter. Click Set to configure the filter. See
Using color vision on page 289 .
Continues on next page
250 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Continued
5 In the Model definition part, define a model for the pattern using an image in front of the camera or using an imported image. The selected calibration will be used.
Note
When importing a vision model it is required to enter model configuration and re-select which calibration to use from the calibration drop-down menu.
This is required even if there is only one calibration defined. If this is not performed then further actions may produce the error No valid calibration for the PatMax model .
a Click Define to define a model. Drag the rectangle so it covers the pattern and move the cross to the desired pick/place position. To maintain the greatest accuracy, the pick/place position should be placed close to the center of the trained pattern.
xx1800001708 b Click Train to train the pattern.
c Select Show Model to show the features of the trained models in the search image.
d If needed, click Advanced to access more model settings.
e Increase the value of Elasticity to allow for any expected non-linear shape distortion, for example, for organic products and so on. The value represents the maximum distance between a trained feature and a matched feature in pixels. The lower limit is 0 and upper limit is 25.
This setting is useful for products of varying shape.
Continues on next page
251 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Continued f Select Ignore polarity to ignore if the features are dark on bright or bright on dark.
Note
PatMax will not care if a product is light on a dark background or dark on a light background. This is useful when the background is, for example, a grid.
g Click Adjust Granularity to define the levels in the Fine and Coarse boxes. Granularity is a radius of influence, in pixels, which determines the detection of a feature in a pattern.
PatMax locates patterns in the search image by first searching only for large features. After locating one or more pattern instances, it uses smaller features to determine the precise transformation between the trained pattern and the pattern in the search image.
PatMax uses the same range of granularity that is computed when training the pattern to detect features in the search image. The granularity parameters fine and coarse are auto-selected when training the pattern and often these values are the best. These can also be set manually. The lower limit is 1 and upper limit is 25.5.
h Click Show mask to edit a mask that determines what parts of the model region to ignore. The effect can be verified by pressing the Train button and checking the Show Model checkbox. This tool is useful when the training scene contains a lot of clutter (reflections and so on).
For more information regarding the effect of the edit controls, hover the mouse pointer over the corresponding control. Click Adjust
Granularity to define the levels in the Fine and Coarse boxes.
6 In the Search parameters part, set parameters to limit the search procedure and the analysis time.
Score Limit indicates how closely the found item matches the trained model.
A score of 1 indicates a perfect match while a score of 0 indicates that the pattern does not match at all. The higher a score threshold is defined the faster PatMax will be able to perform a search.
Angle variation defines the acceptable rotation for the items. If an item has a rotation outside the valid range it will be discarded by the vision system.
Default +/- 180 degrees.
If more settings are required, click Advanced to open the Advanced Search
Settings dialog where the following settings are found:
Items to Find is the number of items that is expected to be present in the image. If there are more items present in the image these will not be reported by PatMax .
Contrast Limit defines the minimum image contrast of each item that is found in the image. The contrast is the average difference in gray-level values for all of the boundary points that PatMax matched between the trained model and the found item in the search image.
PatMax considers only items with a contrast value that exceeds the contrast limit.
Continues on next page
252 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Continued
Area Overlap defines how much multiple patterns in the image are allowed to largely overlap each other.
PatMax assumes that these patterns actually represent the same item in the image. When two patterns overlap by a percentage greater than the area overlap threshold they are treated as a single pattern.
Uniform Scale is a threshold that accepts hits that differ in size relative to the taught vision model. A scale value of 1 indicates that there are no differences between the found item and the taught vision model. A value <1 indicates a smaller model.
Score Using Clutter defines a measure of the extent to which the found item contains features that are not present in the trained vision model. By default the PatMax analysis ignores clutter when scoring which means that the patterns receive the same score regardless of the presence of extra features.
If this checkbox is selected, clutter is included in the calculation of the score.
If the application is an alignment application in which the background does not change, Score Using Clutter should be selected.
Limit Search Region limits the search area for the PatMax analysis. Only objects within this area will be found. A smaller search area will decrease the search time.
Note
When combining Fine/Coarse Granularity and Uniform Scale a slight difference in the score can appear between design time and Runtime.
Therefore, the model should be tested in Runtime to verify that items are identified as expected.
7 In the Post search filters part, define the score values for each pattern in the search image.
Fit Error Limit is a measure of the variance between the shape of the trained pattern and the shape of the pattern found in the search image. If the found pattern in the search image is a perfect fit for the trained pattern, the fit error is 0.
Coverage Limit is a measure of the extent to which all parts of the trained pattern are also present in the search image. If the entire trained pattern is also present in the search image, the coverage score is 1. Lower coverage scores indicate that less of the pattern is present. This parameter can be used to detect missing features.
Clutter limit is a measure of the extent to which the found pattern contains features that are not present in the trained pattern. A clutter of 0 indicates that the found pattern contains no extra features. A clutter score of 1 indicates that for every feature in the trained pattern there is an additional extra feature in the found pattern. The clutter can exceed 1.0.
Inspection Levels - Inspection I , this inspection is also called Inspection I in PickMaster PowerPac. With this function it is possible to classify the found models into two categories. A model can either be classified as accepted or rejected. An accepted model has better search results than the rejected
Continues on next page
253 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Continued model. The item type number is defined for the accepted and rejected model in the Item dialog, see
. An item type can be read in the RAPID code, see
.
Click Set to open the Inspection Parameter dialog. All models that fulfill the conditions specified for the search parameters and the post filters will be classified. Select Use Inspection Levels and click Set to open the dialog and define the parameter that will divide the found items into the two categories. If Use inspection levels is not selected all found models are classified as an accepted model.
For Score , Contrast , and Coverage , items with a value larger than the defined value in Inspection Parameter will be defined as accepted.
For Angle and Uniform Scale , items with a value between the defined values in Inspection Parameter will be defined as accepted.
For Fit Error and Clutter a value less than the defined one will be classified as accepted.
Limit Position Region defines if the PatMax analysis is done on the whole image. Objects found within this area will be handled as normal. Object found outside this area will be discarded.
Click Advanced to open the Advanced Post Search Settings dialog. To define an item region, select the Activate checkbox and click Define . Adjust the polygon showed around the found object using vertices. Then click Train .
The polygon can have 2 to 16 vertices.
8 In the Display options part, select the type of information to display in graphics.
Item angle displays the angle of the item that will be sent to the robot. This angle is relative to the trained model.
Match Info displays the quality of the matched boundary points in the search image.
Save Match Info must be selected before doing the analysis. Boundary points drawn in:
• Red are poor matches.
• Yellow are fair matches.
• Green are good matches.
Item score displays the score for the selected item in the image window.
Item region displays the regions in the image window. Red regions indicate an overlap and the corresponding hits will be considered as discarded.
Note
Item regions cannot be used, if the item positions are modified by a user hook.
Continues on next page
254 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Continued
9 In the Analyze part, click Search to analyze the image. If needed, define sort value.
xx1800001709
The result is displayed as an image with numbered hits in the Image dialog, and a corresponding result list.
xx1800001710
Model hits are normally classified as accepted. If inspection is used, hits can be classified as either accepted or rejected. See
Hits that do not fulfill all the requirements or hits with overlapping regions will not be accessed by any robot and are classified as discarded. The hits shown in the result list are marked with an icon identifying its classification.
Continues on next page
255 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.2 Configuring a geometric model with PatMax
Continued
For hits that are not accepted, the parameter that failed is marked with either red or blue in the result list.
Save Match Info is used to save the match information for every found model.
Searches where match info is generated and stored takes more time. To show the match information, select the Match Info checkbox in the Display options part.
Sort value is used if there is more than one hit for the same item. Only the hit with the highest sort value will be sent to the robot controller. The sort value can be set individually for all models or the PatMax score can be used by selecting Score as sort value .
Search Time displays the time it takes to analyze the image in .
10 Click OK .
Note
Items located after a search operation in the PatMax configuration window is presented as discarded due to item region overlap even if they are actually rejected due to another parameter (fit error, clutter, and so on). This happens only if the item region is activated and the item regions overlap with each other in Runtime. However, the discarded items are removed before applying the item region.
PatMax parameters in item targets
The PatMax parameters
Score
, fit error
, coverage
, and clutter can be selected for the target storage.
Related information
Using color vision on page 289 .
256 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.3 Configuring blob models
4.3.9.3 Configuring blob models
Introduction to blob models
The simplest kinds of images that can be used for machine vision are two-dimensional shapes or blobs. Blob analysis is the detection of two-dimensional shapes within images. It finds objects by identifying groups of pixels that fall into a predefined grayscale range.
This kind of analysis is well suited for applications where:
• Objects vary much in size, shape, and/or orientation.
• Objects are of a distinct shade of gray not found in the background.
Blob analysis works best with images that can be easily segmented into foreground and background pixels. Typically, strong lighting of scenes with opaque objects of interest produces images suitable for an analysis like this.
To increase the contrast in images where parts have similar grayscale tone, it is possible to use color filtering. See
Using color vision on page 289
.
Illustration Blob Configuration xx1900000553 xx1900000554
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
257
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.3 Configuring blob models
Continued xx1900000555 xx1900000556
Configuring a blob vision model
Use this procedure to configure a blob vision model.
1 Select the camera in the Vision Models under Item Source .
2 Click on Blob .
3 In the Image part, click Live , Acquire , or Import to get an image. Select the
Calibration origin checkbox to display help lines for the coordinate system.
Click Histogram to display a graph of the pixel distribution in the acquired image.
If color filtering should be used, select the Color filter checkbox to enable the filter and click Set to configure the filter. See
Using color vision on page 289 .
In the histogram, the horizontal axis represents the pixel values of the image from black to white (0 to 255). The vertical axis indicates the number of pixels at each value. There are also a number of statistical values representing various properties of the histogram such as the value of the darkest and
Continues on next page
258 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.3 Configuring blob models
Continued brightest pixels as well as the mean value and standard deviation of the collection of pixels. For more information, see
.
xx1900000927
4 Click to select White in the Segmentation under Model Definition .
xx1900000928
In the Segmentation part, select segmentation method and blob type.
Segmentation is the division of the pixels in an image into object pixels and background pixels. Typically objects are assigned a value of 1 while background pixels are assigned a value of 0.
Static method uses gray values to divide blob pixels and background pixels.
All pixels with a grayscale value below the threshold are assigned as object pixels, while all pixels with values above the threshold are assigned as background pixels.
Relative method uses a relative threshold expressed as the percentages of the total pixels between the left and right tail to divide blob pixels and background pixels. Tails represent noise-level pixels that lie at the extremes of the histogram (the lowest and the highest values).
Continues on next page
259 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.3 Configuring blob models
Continued
Static is faster than relative segmentation because the gray levels corresponding to the percentages do not have to be computed. Static segmentation can test for absence of a feature in a scene, whereas relative segmentation will always find a blob in the scene.
5 Adjust the parameters in the Search Parameter according to your requirements.
xx1900000929
In the Search Parameters part, define the values for the feature.
Area is expressed in mm
2
.
Perimeter is expressed in mm.
Circularity defines the circularity. A value of 1 means perfectly circular and completely filled (no holes).
Elongation is the ratio of the feature’s second moment of inertia about its second principal axis to the feature’s second moment of inertia about its first principal axis.
Angle defines how the found item is sent to the controller.
• No Orientation means that the found item is sent to the controller with angle 0 (zero).
• First Principal Axis means that the found item is sent down with the angle around the first principal axis. The angle is relative to the x-axis and can be ±90 degrees.
Use boundary box center defines if the position of a blob will be at the center of its boundary box instead of at its center of mass.
No Blob On Edge defines if a blob connected to the edge of the search area should be reported.
Use Inspection Levels defines if the found models should be classified. See
. The item type can be read in the RAPID code, see
. Select Set levels to open the Blob
Inspection Parameters dialog.
Continues on next page
260 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.3 Configuring blob models
Continued
If Use Inspection Levels is not selected all found models are classified as accepted. All models that fulfill the conditions specified for the Search
Parameters will be classified.
Limit Search Region limits the search area for the blob analysis. Only objects within this area will be found.
Note
Tune the blob tool by pressing Search and the blob algorithm lists all the blobs. Adjust the size threshold limit to filter out blobs that are too large or too small. Tune other parameters if necessary..
6 If needed, in the MorphOp part, select the Morphological and/or Clean Up checkboxes and define the settings.
xx0900000542
C
D
A
B
E
Original
Erosion
Dilation
Opening
Closing
Morphological settings:
• Erode reduces or eliminates object features, increases the thickness of holes within an object. This operation replaces each pixel in the image with the maximum value of the pixels and each of its eight vertical and horizontal neighbors.
• Dilation reduces or eliminates holes within an object, increases the thickness of an object’s features. This operation replaces each pixel in the image with the minimum value of the pixel and each of its eight vertical and horizontal neighbors.
• Closing eliminates holes. Preserves small features. An erosion operation is applied to the image, followed by a dilation operation.
Continues on next page
261 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.3 Configuring blob models
Continued
• Opening preserves holes. Eliminates small object features. A dilation operation is applied to the image, followed by an erosion operation.
Clean up settings:
• Prune is used to ignore, but not remove features, that are below a specified size (connectivity size). When an image is pruned of all features below a certain size, the blob measures returned for the blob that enclosed the pruned features are computed as though the pruned features still existed, but the pruned features themselves are not counted.
• Fill is used to fill in pruned features with gray values from neighboring pixels on the left. The pixels value that is used to fill the feature is the value of the pixel to the immediate left of the feature being filled. As each row of pixels in the feature is filled, the pixel value to the immediate left of that row of pixels is used as the fill value for that row.
• Connectivity defines the minimum size (in pixels) that a blob can have to be considered. Is used with either prune or fill.
7 In the Item region part, select the Activate checkbox and click Define . Adjust the polygon showed around the found object using vertices. Then click Train .
The polygon can have 2 to 16 vertices.
8 Click Search in the Display Options
Tip
If the search result matches with the Image Dialog , the configuration success.
Continues on next page
262 xx1900000930
In the Display options part, select Segmentation image to display the processed image. Select how the result will be displayed.
• Item angle displays the angle of the item that will be sent to the robot.
• Item score displays the score for the selected item in the image window.
• Item area displays the area of the blob in the image window.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.3 Configuring blob models
Continued
• Boundary box displays the minimum horizontal rectangle that contains the whole blob.
• Item region displays the regions in the image window. Red regions indicate an overlap and the corresponding hits will be considered as discarded.
9 Click OK .
Blob parameters in item targets
The blob parameters
Area
, perimeter
, circularity
, and elongation can be selected for the target storage.
Related information
Using color vision on page 289 .
.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
263
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Introduction to inspection models
Inspection models make it possible to combine several models of PatMax , blob, histogram, Caliper , and external models. This is sometimes referred to as Inspection
II .
An inspection model always consists of an alignment model. The alignment model can either be a PatMax , blob, or external model and works as the reference for the inspection model. It is this model’s position and rotation that is the pick/place position and rotation for the item.
Inspection areas are defined relative to the alignment model and either blob,
PatMax , histogram, Caliper , or external analysis can be done within each of these areas. Conditions such as number of found items and location relative to the alignment model can be set.
For a found item to be classified as accepted, all inspection areas and the alignment model must be classified as accepted. If one of the inspection areas does not fulfill the given conditions the corresponding item is classified as rejected.
Tip
A more advanced accept or reject decision can be implemented with a user hook.
By adding a selection of upto 5 vision parameters for storage in the item targets, a user hook can implement an advanced accept or reject decision based on the selected parameters and other item target data (for example, position and orientation). For example, the combination of 5 measured caliper distances can be evaluated for the accept or reject decision instead of having a fixed allowed maximum or minimum interval for each caliper distance.
Illustration Inspection Configuration xx1900000931
Continues on next page
264 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
Configuring inspection models
Use this procedure to configure inspection models.
1 Select the camera in the Vision Models under Item Source .
2 Click on Inspection .
3 In the Image part, click Live , Acquire , or Import to get an image.
4 In the Inspection model part, define the relationships between the alignment model and its corresponding inspection areas.
The created models are shown in a tree view.
Alignment model defines the position and orientation of any found items. If an alignment model is already defined, it will be replaced. For more information on the alignment model configuration dialog, see
.
Sub inspection model adds inspection areas to an alignment model. See
Sub inspection models on page 271
.
Edit opens the configuration dialog for the selected model. When an existing alignment model is modified the relations to the inspection areas must be retrained.
Delete is used to delete the selected model and corresponding inspection area.
Edit Areas shows all inspection areas. The areas can be rearranged for the selected sub inspection model.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
265
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
5 Click Create to open the Select Model Type dialog.
xx1900000955
6 Select Geometric or Blob in the drop-down list to create the main model in the Select Model Type dialog and click OK button. For detail procedures on
Continues on next page
266 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued how to create a geometric model or a blob model, see
Configuring a geometric model with PatMax on page 246
or
Configuring blob models on page 257 .
xx1900000956
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
267
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
7 Click Add to open the Select Model Type dialog.
xx1900000957
Continues on next page
268 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
8 Select Geometric , Blob , Histogram or caliper in the drop-down list to create the sub model in the Select Model Type dialog and click OK button.
xx1900000958
9 Click Edit Areas .
xx1900000959
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
269
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
10 Drag the rectangle so it covers the pattern.
xx1900000960
11 Click Edit to open the corresponding model creating window. For detail procedures on how to create a geometric model or a blob model, see
Configuring a geometric model with PatMax on page 246 ,
Configuring blob models on page 257 ,
and
.
xx1900000961
Continues on next page
270 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
12 Click Search .
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued xx1900000962
The result is displayed as an image with numbered hits in the Inspection
Image dialog, and a corresponding detailed list in the Inspection Result dialog.
xx1900000963
Tip
If the search result matches with the Image Dialog , the configuration success.
13 Click OK .
Sub inspection models
Introduction
Sub inspection models are used to add inspection areas to an alignment model.
Each area uses a specified sub inspection model. The inspection area defines where the sub model is to perform its analysis relative the alignment model. The areas are shown in the image and should be moved and resized to cover the area to analyze.
Sub inspection models are configured in their own dialogs. When testing a sub inspection model the alignment hit is shown in the image window together with the corresponding inspection area. Sub inspection models only analyze the part of the image defined by its inspection area.
Continues on next page
271 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
Geometric
A geometric sub inspection model is configured in the same way as a PatMax model. See
Configuring a geometric model with PatMax on page 246
. In addition, the relative positions of the found items and the corresponding alignment hit must be trained.
Required hits defines the number of hits with the sub inspection model within the inspection area that are required for the result to be considered as accepted.
Deviation limits defines the allowed deviations from the trained positions.
After a search and the items are found within the inspection area their positions must be trained. The relative positions are listed as xDiff , yDiff , and AngleDiff .
Click Train to save the positions of the found items relative to the alignment hit.
Geometric subinspection parameters in item targets
The parameter Number of hits can be selected for the target storage.
Blob
A blob sub inspection model is configured in the same way as a blob model. See
Configuring blob models on page 257
. In addition, the number of required hits must be configured.
Required hits defines the number of hits with the sub inspection model within the inspection area that are required for the result to be considered as accepted.
Blob subinspection parameters in item targets
The parameter Number of hits can be selected for the target storage.
Histogram
The histogram tool measures the color or the gray level within any given area.
While using a monochrome camera the histogram tool measures the gray level within a given area. Similarly, if a color camera is used each of the three color channels (Red, Green, and Blue) is measured separately. The histogram tool is useful when the objects to be identified and classified have similar shapes but different colors.
Continues on next page
272 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
The inspection area for a histogram sub inspection model is graphically represented as a circle. But the area used in the histogram analysis is actually a square aligned with the image but enclosed by the inspection area.
1 On the Sub Inspection Model in the Select Model Type dialog box, select
Histogram in the drop-down list and click OK button.
xx1900000950
The Histogram dialog appears. It displays a graph of the pixel distribution of the acquired image.In monochrome mode the Histogram dialog displays a graph of the pixel distribution of the acquired image. The horizontal axis represents the pixel values of the image from black to white (0 to 255). The vertical axis indicates the number of pixels at each value. While using color vision, three graphs each representing the contents of the different color channels (RGB or HSI), are displayed. For more information, see
Using color vision on page 289
.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
273
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
2 Click Edit Areas .
xx1900000951
3 Drag the rectangle so it covers the pattern.
Continues on next page
274 xx1900000952
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
4 Click Edit to open the inspection model creating window.
xx1900000953
5 Press Auto Settings to automatically get a appropriate range limits( Min.
and
Max.
values) for the histogram. Alternatively, the Min.
amd Max.
values can be set manually by sliding the red and green bars across the histogram or by simply entering values into the text boxes. For a product to be accepted, both the standard deviation and the mean value have to be within the specified limits. When using color vision the histograms for all channels must fall within the limits.
xx1900000954
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
275
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
6 If select Use Color , the window for the colors will show up.
xx1900000948 xx1900000949
7 Click OK .
To classify the inspection area as accepted or rejected the histogram tool evaluates two different magnitudes within the specified region:
Mean defines the min and max value for the inspection model. If the inspection area has a mean value less than min or higher than max the inspection area will be classified as rejected.
Std dev is a statistical measure that illustrates how closely all the various pixel values are clustered around the mean value. An even color tone gives a narrow histogram with low standard deviation while a speckled pattern gives a wide histogram and a high value for Std dev .
Histogram subinspection parameters in item targets
The Mean and standard deviation parameters can be selected for the target storage.
Continues on next page
276 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Caliper
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
The Caliper tool identifies edges and measures the distance between them. The analysis is only done within the corresponding inspection area. To increase the contrast in images where parts have similar grayscale tone, it is possible to use color filtering. For more information, see
Using color vision on page 289
xx1900000932
1 On the Sub Inspection Model in the Select Model Type dialog box, select
Caliper in the drop-down list and click OK button.
xx1900000933
Figure 4.2:
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
277
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
2 Click Edit Areas .
xx1900000934
Continues on next page
278 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
3 Drag the rectangle so it covers the pattern.
xx1900000935
4 Click Edit to open the inspection model creating window.
xx1900000936
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
279
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
5 Move the line so the end points are located on the edges of the area under the Image Setting .
xx1900000937
6 Adjust the Search Parameter in the Search Parameters according to the
Defined Distance in the Analyze Area .
xx1900000938
7 Click Search .
Continues on next page
280 xx1900000939
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
The result is displayed in the Distance Search xx1900000940
8 Click OK .
To make a Caliper analysis a rectangle is defined around the search line.
Defined Distance is the distance between the end points of the green line located in the Caliper Image dialog. Move the line so the end points are located on the edges of the area.
Analyze Area Length is the length of the rectangle within which the Caliper analysis will be performed. To increase the Analyze Area Length either increase the Delta
Length value or resize the Defined Distance line.
Analyze Area Width is the width of the rectangle within which the Caliper analysis will be performed. To increase the Analyze Area Width increase the Delta Width value.
Delta Length define the extra mm to add to the Defined Distance to get an Analyze
Area Length .
Analyze Area Length=2*Delta Length + Defined Distance
Delta Width defines the width of the analyze area.
Analyze Area Width=2*Delta Width
From the analyze area a production image is created. The operation sums all the information in the analyze area, accentuating the strength of edges that lie parallel to the Analyze Area Width and reducing the effects of noise.
Edge Properties defines the polarity of the edge. The polarity is defined as the measure from Edge1 to Edge2 .
The Search Parameters defines filters using a Gaussian curve. The filter controls how the Caliper tool removes noises, how it accentuates the peaks of interest in the image, contrast, and distance.
The Distance Search is used to search for two edges with the specified distance
( Defined Distance ) and the defined polarity.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
281
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.9.4 Configuring inspection models
Continued
The Graphic checkboxes define which results should be displayed in the Caliper
Image dialog.
en0900000655
Caliphar subinspection paramters in term targets
The Distance parameter can be selected for the target storage.
External
This function is reserved for next version.
282 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.10 Starting production
4.3.10 Starting production
Production
After switching to the real controller and real Runtime, all operations in the production are reflected in the real cell, and all data comes from the real system.
xx1800001738
Statics
Description
Allows you to control the status of the production and have an overview of the production data.
For more information regarding Statics see
Tuning
Flow Control Allows you to adjust the speed of the conveyor.
For more information regarding Flow Control see
Vision
Allows you to adjust the parameters of the item, work area and robot.
For more information regarding Tuning see
.
Allows you to see the live video of the camera.
For more information regarding Vision see
.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
283
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.10 Starting production
Continued
Vision
Emulation xx1900000569
Use this procedure to do the emulation:
1 On the Production ribbon-tab, click Production .
xx1800001717
Continues on next page
284 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.10 Starting production
Continued
The Production dialog is opened.
xx1800001718
2 Click Recipe and Start to run the production xx1800001719
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
285
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.10 Starting production
Continued
The emulation starts running.
xx1800001720
3 Click Stop to stop the emulation.
Note
When running the production, the movement of 3D models in PickMaster
PowerPac follows the actual system. However, since the 3D models dimension in PickMaster PowerPac cannot be completely consistent with the real cell. The layout of item, conveyor, and robot in the emulation may need to be adjusted according to the actual dimension to make the emulation as close to the actual system as possible.
If the item is missing during the emulation, it may be caused by that the size of the PickMaster PowerPac station is not exactly the same with the real station.
The item is hidden in the conveyor model.
Adjust the height of the conveyor model to show the item normally.
286 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.11 Managing the robot in production
4.3.11 Managing the robot in production
Starting production
Start and stop the production from the Production menu.
During runtime, the robots are accessed from the Production tab in the Workspace area. For more details, see
.
Prerequisites
Pick rate xx1900000550
The solution must be configured to start production.
The recipe must be open and active.
The pick rate is shown as icons in the Production tab when a robot is running.
The following values are shown:
• Number of pick during the last minute.
• Total number of picks since the production was started.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
287
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.3.11 Managing the robot in production
Continued
Robot states
The robot can be in different states.
State
Running
Paused
Emergency State
Stopped
Description
The robot can pick and place items.
The robot is paused in motors off state, or the RAPID program has stopped.
The robot is in emergency stop state.
The robot is stopped, that is no items are handled by the robot or distributed to the robot.
Stopping and resuming the robot
It is possible to stop a robot during runtime.
Click a robot icon in the Production tab and select action from the popup menu.
If more than one robot is connected to a controller ( MultiMove ):
• Restart from stopped state must be performed at the same time for all robots.
To do this, right-click the controller icon in the production tab and select
Restart Robots .
• Stopping one robot will also stop the other robots on the same robot controller.
Emergency stop
In case of emergency:
1 Press the emergency stop button on the robot controller or the FlexPendant to stop the robot immediately.
This sets the controller in emergency state and a warning is displayed on the FlexPendant and in PickMaster PowerPac and Runtime.
2 Fix the problem.
3 Release the emergency button.
4 Then acknowledge and reset the emergency state on the FlexPendant or using the popup menu before you restart the robot.
CAUTION
Emergency stop should not be used for normal program stops as this causes extra, unnecessary wear on the robot.
288 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.4 Using color vision
4.4 Using color vision
Introduction to color vision
PickMaster PowerPaccan either be used with monochrome or color cameras. The difference between the two is that an image acquired with a color camera represents each pixel with three 8-bit values (decimal 0-255) instead of only one 8-bit value for monochrome (grayscale) images. In a monochrome image the 8-bit value represents the gray level from white to black, whereas in a color image the three values represent the content of three separate color channels. These three channels represent red, green, and blue (color space RGB) or hue, saturation, and intensity
(color space HSI). Which color space to work with, depends on the content of the image.
Color spaces
When working with RGB the color of each pixel is represented by its content of red, green, and blue. The numerical representation is straightforward for the three base colors - red (255, 0, 0) green (0, 255, 0), and blue (0, 0, 255). However, it can be difficult to understand the composition of other mixed colors.
HSI is a color space that is more easily translated to the human perception of colors.
• Hue: The location of the color on the on the electromagnetic spectrum. See graphic below.
• Saturation: The purity of the color.
• Intensity: The brightness of the color.
Because the hue spectrum wraps around (both 0 and 255 represent red), it is suitable to display it as a circle.
xx0900000444
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
289
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.4 Using color vision
Continued
When using color filtering it is easier to distinguish between colors if they are dissimilar. The level of similarity may be interpreted as the distance between the colors in color space. The difference may be more pronounced in one or the other of the two color spaces and for this reason it is wise to try out filters in both color spaces.
Lighting
Because a color system provides more information about the color contents of an image it is also more sensitive to lighting conditions. It is very important to provide uniform light, that is consistent over time.
Computer performance
Color vision is very resource consuming; acquisition, warping, and filtering all take more time. It is important to keep the number of cameras and frame rate moderate.
The performance limit can vary greatly as it is a combination of the vision task and the computer resources.
Color vision in PickMaster PowerPac
PickMaster PowerPac provides color vision in the form of a filter except the histogram. This filter is accessible from the PatMax, Blob and Caliper configuration dialogs, both as standalone, alignment and sub-inspection models. The filter is a pre-processing step which takes place before the object recognition or measurement. Every model can have its own individual filter setting.
The camera acquires a color image, that is converted into a grayscale image by passing it through a color filter, as shown in the following figure. The histogram tool takes a slightly different approach to color vision as it skips the filtering step and instead performs the measurement directly on each of the three color channels of the image.
xx0900000445
A
B
C
D
E
Vision model
Color image
Color filter grayscale image
Object recognition
Continues on next page
290 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.4 Using color vision
Continued
The result of the color filter is a grayscale image in which certain colors have been accentuated or attenuated according to the filter settings. The object recognition tools ( Blob / PatMax ) operate on this grayscale image.
xx0900000446
A
B
C
An image acquired with a color camera.
The same scene acquired with a monochrome camera.
The color image after having passed through a filter which is set to extract green.
This is the image that will be used by PatMax/Blob .
Prerequisites
The camera must be a color camera.
The color video format must be configured for the camera.
The Cognex vision license must contain the color tool option.
Calibrating the camera’s white balance
A camera is delivered with default settings. These include three parameters which represent the white balance of the camera. Depending on the light source, the image can get an undesired color tone. Different light sources emit light of different temperatures (color content) and the camera needs to be color calibrated in order to compensate for this light.
The basic concept is to present the camera with a gray scene, that is a scene that has equal contents of red, green, and blue. The most accurate method is to take a sheet of white paper and adjust the light settings of the camera in order to make the scene appear gray.
Use this procedure to calibrate the white balance for the camera.
1 In the line view, right-click on the camera and select Edit .
The Camera Configuration dialog is opened
2 Place a white sheet of paper under the camera. The sheet must cover the whole field of view.
3 Adjust the light settings (aperture or exposure time) to make the scene appear mid-gray. The number of saturated pixels (completely black or white) should be kept to a minimum.
4 Press Calculate. This will calculate the white balance calibration parameters.
Continues on next page
291 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.4 Using color vision
Continued
5 Click Apply .
The camera’s internal settings are now modified. If the calibration is successful the color image and the grayscale image of the white paper sheet should now look the same (gray).
6 Right-click the camera and select Save .
The settings are stored in the camera. If the parameters are not saved, the camera will loose the calibration when PickMaster PowerPac is restarted.
Illustration Color Filter Settings xx1900000943
Configuring color vision
The PatMax and Blob configuration dialogs contain a checkbox to enable color filtering ( Color filter ), and a button to display the filter settings ( Set ).
Use this procedure to configure color vision.
1 In the Image part of the PatMax or Blob configuration dialog, select Color
Filter . This will enable the filter.
Continues on next page
292 xx1900000941
The Color Filter Settings dialog is opened together with a second video window showing the color image.
2 In the Color Filter part, select RGB or HSI .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.4 Using color vision
Continued
3 In the Define color part, color samples can be collected from the display to indicate which colors should be enhanced.
a Click Define . An adjustable rectangle will appear in the color dialog.
xx1900000942 b Move/resize the rectangle to indicate what color should pass through the filter. The indicated color range will be converted to white in the
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
293
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.4 Using color vision
Continued output grayscale image. Colors that are dissimilar to the specified color will be converted to black.
xx1900000943 c Click Get color to store this color range.
Continues on next page
294 xx1900000944
4 In the Manual color filter part, adjust each color channel to improve the result if needed.
• Low specifies the lower limit of the color range that will translate into white pixels in the output image. Minimum is 0 and maximum is 255, except for Hue which has no boundary.
• High specifies the upper limit of the color range that will translate into white pixels in the output image. Minimum is 0 and maximum is 255 except for Hue which has no boundary.
• Fuzzy specifies how colors outside the minimum and maximum thresholds should be filtered to the output grayscale image. A value of 0 indicates that colors outside the range specified by Low and High will be completely removed by the filter - the result is a black and white image. A non-zero value means that colors outside the Low/High range
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.4 Using color vision
Continued will be weighted in the output image. A higher value produces a smoother grayscale image. Minimum is 0, maximum is 255.
5 If needed, add a new color range to the list in the Colors section.
Each pixel of the output image is computed as the corresponding maximum output pixel of all individual color range filters.
6 If needed, adjust the smoothing factor to reduce noise in the resulting grayscale image.
7 Click OK to close the dialog.
Example 1 xx1900000945
8 Proceed to define the object recognition model.
Tip
Filter ranges should be narrow to provide an output image with high contrast.
From an image quality perspective, it is often better to select small homogeneously colored samples and add several ranges to the list of colors.
Tip
Try to filter with both RGB and HSI. Sometimes one may work significantly better than the other.
This example describes how to locate a part with PatMax and inspect the color with Blob .
1 Create an inspection model, see
Configuring inspection models on page 264 .
2 Create a PatMax alignment model. Use color filtering if contrast needs to be increased, or use the unfiltered monochrome image if there is sufficient contrast.
Continues on next page
295 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.4 Using color vision
Continued
3 Add a Blob sub inspection model.
a Select Color filter and click Set . This opens the Color Filter Settings dialog.
b Extract the color to be inspected by clicking Define color . This filters the desired color into white in the Blob image window.
c Click Set filter to close the Color Filter Settings dialog.
d Adjust the Blob settings so as to find the white blob.
e If necessary, adjust the settings of the color filter and the Blob analysis.
4 Test the result in the Inspection Configuration dialog.
Example 2
Color image before filter
Black and white image after filter xx1900000946
296 xx1900000947
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.5 Ghost Picking
4.5 Ghost Picking
Overview
Ghost picking flow is used by the application engineer to run the dry cycle function before the production. The user sees the robot picking up empty objects. This feature differs from the production in that its incoming material is virtual and is provided by the flow generated by the previous record.
Creating a ghost picking flow
Use this procedure to create a ghost picking flow:
1 Open the solution need to do the ghost picking.
2 Right click Recipe in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
xx1800001727
The Recipe setting window is opened.
xx1900000676
3 Click the Conveyor WA in the Available worarea which need to be recorded to open the work area setting window.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
297
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.5 Ghost Picking
Continued
4 Select Record Scenes checkbox in the Record Setting .
xx1900000593
5 Set the record time according to your requirements.
6 Click OK to apply the configuration.
7 Click OK to close the Recipe dialog.
8 Run the production to start the recording.
The created
.xml
file is stored in the Documents\RobotStudio\PickMaster
PowerPac folder.
xx1900000548
Adding a ghost picking flow to a solution
Use this procedure to add a ghost picking flow:
1 On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Recipe .
2 On the ribbon-tab, click Flow .
xx1800001721
Continues on next page
298 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.5 Ghost Picking
Continued
The Create Sim Flow window is opened.
xx1800001722
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
299
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.5 Ghost Picking
Continued
3 Click Add Rectangle Flow or Add Sector Flow to add a flow.
A new flow is created.
xx1800001723
4 Click Add Item in the Item/Container tab to add an item for the flow.
5 Click to open the Flow Properties window.
Continues on next page
300 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.5 Ghost Picking
Continued
6 Click to choose the Ghost Picking radio button in the Flow Type .
xx1800001724
7 Click the Import Flow icon to import the predefined work area .xml
file.
xx1900000549
8 Click OK to apply the configuration.
9 Click OK to close the Create Sim Flow dialog.
Select ghost picking flow (Modify recipe)
Use this procedure to select a ghost picking flow:
1 Right-click on one Recipe in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
xx1800001727
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
301
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.5 Ghost Picking
Continued
The Recipe setting window is opened.
xx1900000661
2 Click on the Pick Operation1 to open the setting window for the pick operation.
3 In the Select Flow under Main Setting , select Flow1 in the drop down list.
Continues on next page
302 xx1800001729
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.5 Ghost Picking
Continued
4 Select the Camera checkbox in the Available Camera .
xx1800001730
5 If needed, select the Vision in the Source Type .
6 Select Distance in the Trigger/Filter Setting tab.
xx1800001731
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
303
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.5 Ghost Picking
Continued
7 Add the Conveyor WA 1 to the Accept by dragging under the Distribution
Setting tab.
xx1800001732
8 Click OK to close the Recipe setting window.
Ghost picking flow
Note
To run the ghost picking, the work area signals need to be set as predefined signals.
Use this procedure to run a ghost picking flow:
1 On the PickMaster PowerPac ribbon-tab, click Production .
xx1800001737
Continues on next page
304 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.5 Ghost Picking
Continued
The Production window is opened.
xx1800001738
2 Select the recipe which will be running.
xx1800001739
3 If need, select the Loop checkbox in the Ghost Picking .
Note
If the Loop checkbox is selected, the ghost picking will repeat sending the recorded position data to the real controller until the Stop icon is clicked.
If the Loop checkbox is not selected, the ghost picking will send the recorded position data to the real controller for just one time and stopped automatically.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
305
4 Working with PickMaster PowerPac
4.5 Ghost Picking
Continued xx1800001740
4 Click the Start icon to start the ghost picking in the production.
306 xx1800001741
5 Click the Stop icon to stop the ghost picking in the production.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Overview
This example describes a solution which contains one robot, two liner conveyors.
The robot picks the items from one liner conveyor and place them into the containers on the second liner conveyor.
xx1900000667
Creating the solution
Opening the solution
1
Action
Double click to open the PickMaster
PowerPac.
Note/Illustration
2 Click the New to create a new solution.
xx1900000470 xx1800000840
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
307
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Adding the controller
1
Action
Click the Controller under Layout to open the Add Existing System dialog box.
Note/Illustration
2 Click Add and then browse and select the folder to be added to the System Pool .
To remove a folder from the list, click
Remove .
xx1800000845
3 Click a system to select it for the new solution in the Systems Found table lists.
xx1800000846
4 In the Set Robot1 Pose window, enter numbers (0,0,1600) in the Position X Y Z
(mm) text box and (180,0,0) in the Orientation (deg) text box.
xx1800000847
5 Click OK to finish the adding of the controller.
xx1900000472
Continues on next page
308 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Adding the gripper
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Gripper under
Layout .
Note/Illustration xx1800000852
2 In the Gripper window, enter "Test1" in the Gripper Name text box.
xx1900000473
3 Click OK to finish the adding of the gripper.
Adding the conveyor
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Conveyor under
Layout .
Note/Illustration xx1800000855
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
309
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
2
3
Action
In the Conveyor window, enter " Linear1 " in the Conveyor Name text box.
In the Conveyor window, select the type as " Linear " in the Conveyor Type dropdown list.
Note/Illustration
Continues on next page
310 xx1900000653
4
5
6
7
8
Click on the Preview button to set the preference of the conveyor.
Enter numbers (3000,400,500) in the LWH
Size(mm) text box to define the size of the conveyor.
In the Conveyor window, enter numbers
(-1000,-400,0) in the Position X Y Z (mm) text box and (0,0,0) in the Orientation
(deg) text boxes to define the location of the conveyor.
xx1900000654
Click OK to finish the adding of the conveyor.
On the ribbon-tab, click Conveyor under
Layout .
9 In the Conveyor window, enter " Linear2 " in the Conveyor Name text box.
10 In the Conveyor window, select the type as " Linear " in the Conveyor Type dropdown list.
xx1800000855 xx1900000655
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Action
11 Click on the Preview button to set the preference of the conveyor.
12 Enter numbers (3000,400,500) in the LWH
Size(mm) text box to define the size of the conveyor.
Note/Illustration
13 In the Conveyor window, enter numbers
(-1000,0,0) in the Position X Y Z (mm) text box and (0,0,0) in the Orientation
(deg) text boxes to define the location of the conveyor.
14 Click OK to finish the adding of the conveyor.
xx1900000656
Adding the sensor
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Sensor under
Layout .
Note/Illustration xx1800001411
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
311
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
2
3
4
Action
In the Sensor window, enter "Test1" in the Camera Name text box.
In the Camera window, select " Linear1 " in the Attached to Conveyor/Index dropdown list.
Click OK to finish the adding of the sensor.
Note/Illustration xx1900000657
Adding the work area
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Workarea under
Layout .
Note/Illustration xx1800001417
Continues on next page
312 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
2
3
Action
In the Conveyor Workarea window, enter
"LinearWA1" in the Workarea Name text box.
In the Conveyor Board drop down list, select the correct conveyor board which has been connected to the liner conveyor.
Note/Illustration
Tip
The connection between the conveyor board and the conveyor are defined by users.
4
5
6
In the Conveyor drop down list, select the " Linear1 " conveyor.
In the Workarea Type radio box, select the "Pick" option.
Click OK to finish the adding of the linear
1 conveyor work area.
7 On the ribbon-tab, click Workarea under
Layout .
xx1900000658 xx1800001417
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
313
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
8
9
Action
In the Conveyor Workarea window, enter
"LinearWA2" in the Workarea Name text box.
In the Conveyor Board drop down list, select the correct conveyor board which has been connected to the liner conveyor.
Note/Illustration
Tip
The connection between the conveyor board and the conveyor are defined by users.
10 In the Conveyor drop down list, select the " Linear2 " conveyor.
11 In the Workarea Type radio box, select the "Place" option.
12 Click OK to finish the adding of the linear
2 conveyor work area.
xx1900000659
Adding the item
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Item under Recipe .
Note/Illustration xx1800001429
2
3
In the Item Type part under Item Properties , select the Cylinder radio box.
In the RH Size part under Item Properties , define the item’s size as (50, 5).
4 In the Color part under Item Properties , define the item's color as RGB
(255,128,128).
xx1900000660
Continues on next page
314 xx1900000485
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
5
Action
In the Source Type under Item Source , select the Vision radio box.
Note/Illustration xx1900000487
6 Click OK to finish the adding of the item.
Adding the container
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Container under
Recipe .
Note/Illustration
2 Use the default settings in the Container
Properties .
xx1800001433
3
4
Click on the Container Pattern tab.
Click Add layer .
xx1900000491 xx1900000492
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
315
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
5
Action
In the Add Layer View window, click to select the item, and enter numbers
(100,100,0,0,1) in the Selected Item(s) text box.
Note/Illustration
6
7
Click OK to finish the adding of the new layer.
In the Source Type under Container
Source tab , select the Predefined radio box.
xx1900000493
8 Click OK to finish the adding of the container.
xx1900000494
Adding the recipe
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Recipe under
Recipe .
Note/Illustration xx1800001438 xx1900000505
Continues on next page
316 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
2
3
4
5
6
Action
Click on the Pick Operation1 to open the setting window for the pick operation.
In the Source Type under Detection
Setting , select the Vision radio box.
Click to select the Test1 in Available
Camera .
Note/Illustration
Click to select the Item1 in Available
Objects .
Click to select the LinearWA1 in Available Workareas .
xx1900000661
7 In the Distribution tab under Distribution
Setting , click on Item1 in the Available
Items and drag LinearWA1 from the
Available distributors list to the Distribution Accept list.
8
9
Click on the Place Operation1 to open the setting window for the place operation
1.
In the Source Type under Detection
Setting , select the Predefined radio box.
10 Click to select the PContainer1 in Available Objects .
11 Click to select the LinearWA2Available
Workareas in Available Workareas .
xx1900000662 xx1900000663
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
317
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Action
12 In the Trigger/Filter Setting tab, click to select the Distance radio button.
13 In the Trigger/Filter Setting tab, define the Trigger Distance as 300 mm.
Note/Illustration
14 In the Distribution tab under Distribution
Setting , click on Item1 in the Available
Items and drag LinearWA2 from the
Available distributors list to the Distribution Accept list.
15 Click OK to finish the adding of the recipe.
xx1900000664
Calibration xx1900000665
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Calibration under
Simulation .
Note/Illustration xx1900000520
2 The Calibration runs automatically.
xx1900000666
Continues on next page
318 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Simulation
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Start under Simulation to start the simulation.
Note/Illustration
2 On the ribbon-tab, click Stop under Simulation to stop the simulation.
xx2000000317 xx2000000318
3 On the ribbon-tab, click Reset under
Simulation to clean up the items on the conveyors in the solution.
xx2000000319
Switching to Online environment and configuration
1
Action
Right-click the RunTime in the tree view
Cell and select Start Local RRT .
Note/Illustration
2 Right-click the RunTime in the tree view
Cell and select Connect to RRT .
xx1800001387
3 In the Sign in dialog, enter the correct information.
Note
A default admin user, with full access, is provided with the following credentials:
• User: admin
• Password: password
4 Click OK .
xx2000000314 xx1800001388
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
319
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
5
Action
Right-click the Controller in the tree view
Cell and select Edit Controller .
Note/Illustration
6 Click on the Select Real Controller icon to open the Select Real Controller dialog.
xx1900000677
7
8
In the dialog box, choose the real controller to be connected.
Click OK to apply the configuration.
xx1800001714
9 Click Close to close the Edit Controller dialog.
xx1800001715
Continues on next page
320 xx1800001713
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Action
10 Right-click on one LinearWA1 in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
Note/Illustration
11 Select the Customized Settings in the
Signal Type tab.
xx1900000681
12 Enter the required data into the I/O signal setting table.
13 Click OK to close the Recipe setting window.
xx1800001735 xx1900000668
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
321
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Action
14 Right-click on one LinearWA2 in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
Note/Illustration
15 Select the Customized Settings in the
Signal Type tab.
16 Enter the required data into the I/O signal setting table.
17 Click OK to close the Recipe setting window.
xx1900000682
18 Right-click the Test1 in the tree view
Sensor and select Configuration .
xx1900000669 xx1900000670
Continues on next page
322 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Action
19 In the Imaging device list, select the
Gigabit Ethernet camera to which the camera is connected.
Note/Illustration
20 In the Video format list, select the type of the connected camera.
Tip
Select the type is to choose the color of the camera.
xx1900000671
21 Click OK to finish the configuration of the camera.
22 Right-click the Test1 in the tree view
Sensor and select Calibrate .
xx1900000645 xx1900000529
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
323
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Action
23 Select the default calibration from the list and click Edit .
Note/Illustration xx1800001468 xx1800001469
24 In the Settings part, adjust the grid pitch if the squares on the printed calibration paper differs from 10.0 mm. Enter an appropriate name for the calibration.
xx1800001701
Continues on next page
324 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Action
25 In the Image part, click Live to get and show new images continuously, or click
Acquire to get one new image. To use an image from file or save the current image, click Import or Export .
Note/Illustration
26 For single-view calibration: When the calibration plate is in position, acquire an image and click Set Origin in the Calibration images part. This stores the image and marks it as the origin image (the origin of this image will be the physical origin of the camera’s coordinate system).
xx1800001470
27 In the Calibration part, click Calibrate to start calibration.
xx1900000646 xx1900000647
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
325
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Action
28 Adjust the rectangle to the desired region and click Set Region to define the resulting image size.
Note/Illustration
29 Click OK to finish the calibrating of the camera.
30 Right-click on the Item1 in the tree view
Cell and select Setting .
31 Click to select Test1 in the Vision Models and click Geometric to open the geometric window.
xx1900000648
32 In the Image part, click Live to get and show new images continuously, or click
Acquire to get one new image. To use an image from file or save the current image, click Import or Export .
xx1900000530 xx1900000649
Continues on next page
326 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
Action
33 Click Define to open the train shape of the item1.
Note/Illustration
34 Drag the train shape center point to the item's center.
xx1900000650 xx1800001708
35 Click Train to open the train shape of the item1.
xx1900000651
36 Click OK to close and save the PatMax model.
37 Click Ok to close and save the Item1 setting .
Production
1
Action
Click to select the Recipe in the tree view
Cell .
Note/Illustration xx1800001716
2 On the Production ribbon-tab, click Production .
xx1800001717
Continues on next page
327 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.1 Example: One pick work area and one place work area
Continued
3
Action
Click to select Recipe in the Recipe
Status and click triangle mark ( Start ) to run the production.
Note/Illustration
4 Click Stop to stop the production.
xx1800001719
328 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.2 Example: One pick from indexed work area and one place work area
5.2 Example: One pick from indexed work area and one place work area
Overview
This example describes changing a solution which contains one robot, two linear conveyors (both using predefined sensor) to a solution which contains one robot, one linear conveyor and one index work area. The robot picks the items from the index work area and place them into the containers on the linear conveyor.
This example uses the previous example as a basis to do the subsequent operations.
xx1900000680
Changing the solution
Opening the solution
For detail procedure in opening the solution, see
Opening the solution on page 307 .
Deleting the linear conveyor from the solution
1
Action
Right click on the Recipe under Recipes in the tree view browser and click Delete .
Note/Illustration xx1900000532
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
329
5 Production examples
5.2 Example: One pick from indexed work area and one place work area
Continued
2
Action
Click Yes in the pop-up window to delete the recipe.
Note/Illustration
3 Right click on the Camera under Sensor in the tree view browser and click Delete .
xx1900000533
4 Click Yes in the pop-up window to delete the camera.
xx1900001569 xx1900001570
5 Right click on the Linear WA1 under
Conveyors in the tree view browser and click Delete .
Tip
The linear WA1 is for the picking operation.
xx1900000534
6 Click Yes in the pop-up window to delete the Linear WA1 .
xx1900000535
Continues on next page
330 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.2 Example: One pick from indexed work area and one place work area
Continued
7
Action
Right click on the Linear1 under Conveyors in the tree view browser and click
Delete .
Note/Illustration
Tip
The linear1 is for the picking operation.
xx1900000536
Adding the index work area
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Indexed Workarea under Layout .
Note/Illustration xx1800001426
2
3
4
In the Conveyor Workarea window, enter
"IndexedWA1" in the Workarea Name text box.
In the Workarea Type radio box, select the "Pick" option.
In the Work Object drop down list, select the correct object.
Tip
The connection between the conveyor board and the conveyor are defined by users.
5 Enter numbers (-200,-400,500) in the Position X Y Z (mm) text box and (0,0,0) in the Orientation (deg) text boxes to define the location of the conveyor.
xx1900000537
6 Click OK to finish the adding of the indexed work area.
xx1900000539
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
331
5 Production examples
5.2 Example: One pick from indexed work area and one place work area
Continued
Editing the item source type
1
Action
Right click on Item1 under Items in the tree view browser and click Setting .
Note/Illustration
2 In the Item Source under Item1 Setting , select the Predefined radio box.
xx2000000315 xx2000000316
3 Click OK to finish the adding of the item.
Adding the new recipe
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Recipe under
Recipe .
Note/Illustration
2
3
Click on the Pick Operation1 to open the setting window for the pick operation.
In the Associated Conveyor under Main
Setting , select IndexWA in the drop down list.
xx1800001438 xx1900000540
Continues on next page
332 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.2 Example: One pick from indexed work area and one place work area
Continued
4
5
6
Action
In the Source Type under Detection
Setting , select the Predefined radio box.
Click to select the Item1 in Available
Objects .
Click to select the Indexed WA 1 in
Available Workareas .
Note/Illustration
7 In the Distribution tab under Distribution
Setting , click on Item1 in the Available
Items and drag Indexed WA 1 from the
Available distributors list to the Distribution Accept list.
xx1900000541
8
9
Click on the Place Operation1 to open the setting window for the place operation
1.
In the Associated Conveyor under Main
Setting , select Linear 2 in the drop down list.
10 In the Source Type under Detection
Setting , select the Predefined radio box.
11 Click to select the PContainer1 in Available Objects .
12 Click to select the Linear WA2 in Available Workareas .
xx1900000542
13 In the Trigger/Filter Setting tab, click to select the Distance radio button.
14 In the Trigger/Filter Setting tab, define the Trigger Distance as 300 mm.
xx1900000543 xx1900000544
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
333
5 Production examples
5.2 Example: One pick from indexed work area and one place work area
Continued
Action
15 In the Distribution tab under Distribution
Setting , click on Item1 in the Available
Items and drag Linear WA 2 from the
Available distributors list to the Distribution Accept list.
Note/Illustration xx1900000545
16 Click OK to finish the adding of the recipe.
Calibration
For detail procedure on calibrating the solution, see
Simulation
For detail procedure on simulating the solution, see
.
Switching to Online environment and configuration
1
Action
Connect to the real RunTime .
2 Select the real controller.
3 Right-click on one Linear WA2 in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
Note/Illustration
For more details, see
Switching to Online environment and configuration on page 319 .
For more details, see
Switching to Online environment and configuration on page 319 .
4 Select the Customized Settings in the
Signal Type tab.
xx1900000673 xx1800001735
Continues on next page
334 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.2 Example: One pick from indexed work area and one place work area
Continued
5
Action
Enter the required data into the I/O signal setting table.
Note/Illustration
6
7
Click OK to close the Recipe setting window.
Right-click on one Indexed WA in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
xx1900000523
8
9
Select the Customized Settings in the
Signal Type tab.
Enter the required data into the I/O signal setting table.
xx1900000674
Production xx1900000675
10 Click OK to close the Recipe setting window.
For detail procedure on production, see
.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
335
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Overview
This example describes a solution which contains one robot, two linear conveyors and one circular conveyor. The robot picks the cylinder items from circular conveyor and place them into the containers on the first linear conveyor and the box items from circular conveyor and place them into the containers on the second linear conveyor separately at the same time.
xx1900000531
Creating the solution
Opening the solution
For detail procedure in opening the solution, see
Opening the solution on page 307 .
Adding the controller
For detail procedure in adding the controller, see
Adding the controller on page 308 .
Adding the gripper
For detail procedure in adding the controller, see
Adding the gripper on page 309 .
Adding the conveyor
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Conveyor under
Layout .
Note/Illustration xx1800000855
Continues on next page
336 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
2
3
Action
In the Conveyor window, enter " Circular " in the Conveyor Name text box.
In the Conveyor window, select the type as " Circle " in the Conveyor Type dropdown list.
Note/Illustration xx1900000474
4
5
6
7
8
Click on the Preview button to set the preference of the conveyor.
Enter numbers (550,500) in the RH
Size(mm) text box to define the size of the conveyor.
In the Conveyor window, enter numbers
(0,700,0) in the Position X Y Z (mm) text box and (0,0,90) in the Orientation (deg) text boxes to define the location of the conveyor.
xx1900000475
Click OK to finish the adding of the conveyor.
On the ribbon-tab, click Conveyor under
Layout .
9 In the Conveyor window, enter " Linear1 " in the Conveyor Name text box.
10 In the Conveyor window, select the type as " Linear " in the Conveyor Type dropdown list.
xx1800000855 xx1900000476
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
337
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
11 Click on the Preview button to set the preference of the conveyor.
12 Enter numbers (3000,300,500) in the LWH
Size(mm) text box to define the size of the conveyor.
Note/Illustration
13 In the Conveyor window, enter numbers
(-1200,-200,0) in the Position X Y Z (mm) text box and (0,0,0) in the Orientation
(deg) text boxes to define the location of the conveyor.
xx1900000477
14 Click OK to finish the adding of the conveyor.
15 On the ribbon-tab, click Conveyor under
Layout .
16 In the Conveyor window, enter " Linear2 " in the Conveyor Name text box.
17 In the Conveyor window, select the type as " Linear " in the Conveyor Type dropdown list.
xx1800000855 xx1900000478
18 Click on the Preview button to set the preference of the conveyor.
19 Enter numbers (3000,300,500) in the LWH
Size(mm) text box to define the size of the conveyor.
20 In the Conveyor window, enter numbers
(-1200,-500,0) in the Position X Y Z (mm) text box and (0,0,0) in the Orientation
(deg) text boxes to define the location of the conveyor.
xx1900000479
21 Click OK to finish the adding of the conveyor.
Adding the sensor
For detail procedure in adding the controller, see
Adding the sensor on page 311 .
Continues on next page
338 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Adding the work area
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Circular Conveyor Workarea under Layout .
Note/Illustration
2
3
In the Conveyor Workarea window, enter
"CircularWA" in the Workarea Name text box.
In the Conveyor Board drop down list, select the correct conveyor board which has been connected to the circular conveyor.
Tip
The connection between the conveyor board and the conveyor are defined by users.
4
5
In the Conveyor drop down list, select the " Circular " conveyor.
In the Workarea Type radio box, select the "Pick" option.
xx1800001420
6
7
Click OK to finish the adding of the circular conveyor work area.
On the ribbon-tab, click Workarea under
Layout .
xx1900000481 xx1800001417
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
339
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
8
9
Action
In the Conveyor Workarea window, enter
"LinearWA1" in the Workarea Name text box.
In the Conveyor Board drop down list, select the correct conveyor board which has been connected to the liner conveyor.
Note/Illustration
Tip
The connection between the conveyor board and the conveyor are defined by users.
10 In the Conveyor drop down list, select the " Linear1 " conveyor.
11 In the Workarea Type radio box, select the "Place" option.
12 Click OK to finish the adding of the linear
1 conveyor work area.
13 On the ribbon-tab, click Workarea under
Layout .
xx1900000482 xx1800001417
14 In the Conveyor Workarea window, enter
"LinearWA2" in the Workarea Name text box.
15 In the Conveyor Board drop down list, select the correct conveyor board which has been connected to the second liner conveyor.
Tip
The connection between the conveyor board and the conveyor are defined by users.
16 In the Conveyor drop down list, select the " Linear2 " conveyor.
17 In the Workarea Type radio box, select the "Place" option.
18 Click OK to finish the adding of the linear
2 conveyor work area.
xx1900000483
Continues on next page
340 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Adding the item
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Item under Recipe .
Note/Illustration xx1800001429
2
3
4
In the Item Type part under Item Properties , select the Cylinder radio box.
In the RH Size part under Item Properties , define the item’s size as (50, 5).
In the Color part under Item Properties , define the item's color as RGB
(255,128,128).
5 In the Rapid Properties part under Item
Properties , define the item's Accepted
Type as " 1 ".
Tip
The Accepted Type defines the class of different items.
xx1900000485
6 In the Source Type under Item Source , select the Vision radio box.
xx1900000486 xx1900000487
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
341
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
7
8
Action
Click OK to finish the adding of the item.
On the ribbon-tab, click Item under Recipe .
Note/Illustration xx1800001429
9 In the Item Type part under Item Properties , select the Box radio box.
10 In the LWH Size part under Item Properties , define the item’s size as (50,50, 5).
11 In the Color part under Item Properties , define the item's color as RGB
(128,255,255).
xx1900000488
12 In the Rapid Properties part under Item
Properties , define the item's Accepted
Type as " 2 ".
Tip
The Accepted Type defines the class of different items.
xx1900000489 xx1900000490
Continues on next page
342 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
13 In the Source Type under Item Source , select the Vision radio box.
Note/Illustration xx1900000487
14 Click OK to finish the adding of the item.
Adding the container
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Container under
Recipe .
Note/Illustration
2 Use the default settings in the Container
Properties .
xx1800001433
3
4
Click on the Container Pattern tab.
Click Add layer .
xx1900000491 xx1900000492
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
343
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
5
Action
In the Add Layer View window, enter numbers (100,100,0,0,1) in the Selected
Item(s) text box.
Note/Illustration
6
7
Click OK to finish the adding of the new layer.
In the Source Type under Container
Source tab , select the Predefined radio box.
xx1900000493
8
9
Click OK to finish the adding of the container.
On the ribbon-tab, click Container under
Recipe .
xx1900000494
10 Use the default settings in the Container
Properties .
xx1800001433 xx1900000495
Continues on next page
344 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
11 Click on the Container Pattern tab.
12 Click Add layer .
Note/Illustration
13 Click on the item in the container and click Detele to delete the default item in the container in the Add Layer View window.
xx1900000492
14 Select the Item2 in the Available Objs drop down list.
xx1900000496
15 Click Add to add item2 to the container2.
16 In the Add Layer View window, enter numbers (100,100,0,0,1) in the Selected
Item(s) text box.
xx1900000497
17 Click OK to finish the adding of the new layer.
xx1900000498
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
345
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
18 In the Source Type under Container
Source tab , select the Predefined radio box.
Note/Illustration
Adding the flow
19 Click OK to finish the adding of the container.
xx1900000499
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Flow under Recipe .
Note/Illustration
2
3
Click the Add Sector Flow button to open the preference of Flow 1 window.
Click the Add item in the Item/Containers tab to add Item1 and Item2 to this flow.
xx1800001721
4 Click Edit Layout button on the right corner of Flow Properties tab.
xx1900000500
Continues on next page
346 xx1900000501
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
5
6
Action
Click Add in the Available Objs to add the Item1 into the flow.
In the Edit Layout window, enter numbers
(50,50,0,0,1) in the Selected Item(s) text box.
Note/Illustration
7 Select the Item2 in the Available Objs drop down list and click Add to add the
Item1 into the flow.
xx1900000502
8 In the Edit Layout window, enter numbers
(150,120,0,0,2) in the Selected Item(s) text box.
xx1900000503
9 Click OK to finish the editing layout.
10 Click OK to finish the adding of the flow.
xx1900000504
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
347
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Adding the recipe
1
Action
On the ribbon-tab, click Recipe under
Recipe .
Note/Illustration xx1800001438
2 Click on the Available Devices to open the setting window for the recipe.
xx1900000505 xx1900000508
3
4
5
Click the Import in the Robot1 under
Robot Setting to choose the rapid.
Click the Browser in the Rapid Editor under Robot Setting to choose the editor.
Click the Edit button in the Rapid Editor under Robot Setting and change the file.
Tip xx1900000506
Replace the old code:
PROC PickPlaceSeq()
Pick PickWorkArea{1};
! Pick PickWorkArea{2};
Place PlaceWorkArea{1};
! Place PlaceWorkArea{2};
ENDPROC with the new code:
PROC PickPlaceSeq()
Pick PickWorkArea{1};
IF PickTarget.Type = 1 THEN
Place PlaceWorkArea{1};
ELSEIF PickTarget.Type = 2 THEN
Place PlaceWorkArea{2};
ENDIF
ENDPROC xx1900000507
Continues on next page
348 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
6
Action
Click on the Add Place Operation button to add one more place operation.
Note/Illustration
7
8
Click on the Pick Operation1 to open the setting window for the pick operation.
In the Select Flow under Main Setting , select Flow1 in the drop down list.
9 Click to select the Item Discard checkbox under Main Setting .
10 In the Source Type under Detection
Setting , select the Vision radio box.
xx1900000509
11 Click to select the Test1 in Available
Camera .
12 Click to select the CircularWA in Available Workareas .
xx1900000510
13 In the Distribution tab under Distribution
Setting , click on Item1 in the Available
Items and drag CircularWA from the
Available distributors list to the Distribution Accept list.
xx1900000511 xx1900000512
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
349
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
14 In the Distribution tab under Distribution
Setting , click on Item2 in the Available
Items and drag CircularWA from the
Available distributors list to the Distribution Accept list.
Note/Illustration
15 Click on the Place Operation1 to open the setting window for the place operation
1.
16 In the Source Type under Detection
Setting , select the Predefined radio box.
17 Click to select the PContainer1 in Available Objects .
18 Click to select the LinearWA1 in Available Workareas .
xx1900000513
19 In the Trigger/Filter Setting tab, click to select the Distance radio button.
20 In the Trigger/Filter Setting tab, define the Trigger Distance as 300 mm.
xx1900000514
21 In the Distribution tab under Distribution
Setting , click on Item1 in the Available
Items and drag LinearWA1 from the
Available distributors list to the Distribution Accept list.
xx1900000515 xx1900000516
Continues on next page
350 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
22 Click on the Place Operation2 to open the setting window for the place operation
2.
23 In the Source Type under Detection
Setting , select the Predefined radio box.
Note/Illustration
24 Click to select the PContainer2 in Available Objects .
25 Click to select the LinearWA2 in Available Workareas .
26 In the Trigger/Filter Setting tab, select the Distance radio button.
27 In the Trigger/Filter Setting tab, define the Trigger Distance as 300 mm.
xx1900000517
28 In the Distribution tab under Distribution
Setting , click on Item2 in the Available
Items and drag LinearWA2 from the
Available distributors list to the Distribution Accept list.
xx1900000518 xx1900000519
29 Click OK to finish the adding of the recipe.
Calibration
For detail procedure on calibrating the solution, see
Simulation
For detail procedure on simulating the solution, see
.
Switching to Online environment and configuration
1
Action
Connect to the real RunTime .
2 Select the real controller.
Note/Illustration
For more details, see
Switching to Online environment and configuration on page 319 .
For more details, see
Switching to Online environment and configuration on page 319 .
Continues on next page
351 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
3
Action
Right-click on one CircularWA in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
Note/Illustration
4 Select the Customized Settings in the
Signal Type tab.
xx1900000522
5 Enter the required data into the I/O signal setting table.
xx1800001735
6
7
Click OK to close the Recipe setting window.
Right-click on one LinearWA1 in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
xx1900000523 xx1900000524
Continues on next page
352 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
8
9
Action
Select the Customized Settings in the
Signal Type tab.
Enter the required data into the I/O signal setting table.
Note/Illustration
10 Click OK to close the Recipe setting window.
11 Right-click on one LinearWA2 in the tree view Cell and select Setting .
xx1900000525
12 Select the Customized Settings in the
Signal Type tab.
13 Enter the required data into the I/O signal setting table.
xx1900000526
14 Click OK to close the Recipe setting window.
15 Right-click the Test1 in the tree view
Sensor and select Configuration .
xx1900000527 xx1900000528
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
353
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
16 In the Imaging device list, select the
Gigabit Ethernet camera to which the camera is connected.
Note/Illustration
17 In the Video format list, select the type of the connected camera.
Tip
Select the type is to choose the color of the camera.
xx1800001465
18 Click OK to finish the configuration of the camera.
19 Right-click the Test1 in the tree view
Sensor and select Calibration .
xx1900000645 xx1900000529
Continues on next page
354 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
20 Select the default calibration from the list and click Edit .
Note/Illustration xx1800001468 xx1800001469
21 In the Settings part, adjust the grid pitch if the squares on the printed calibration paper differs from 10.0 mm. Enter an appropriate name for the calibration.
xx1800001701
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
355
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
22 In the Image part, click Live to get and show new images continuously, or click
Acquire to get one new image. To use an image from file or save the current image, click Import or Export .
Note/Illustration
23 For single-view calibration: When the calibration plate is in position, acquire an image and click Set Origin in the Calibration images part. This stores the image and marks it as the origin image (the origin of this image will be the physical origin of the camera’s coordinate system).
xx1800001470
24 In the Calibration part, click Calibrate to start calibration.
xx1900000646 xx1900000647
Continues on next page
356 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
25 Adjust the rectangle to the desired region and click Set Region to define the resulting image size.
Note/Illustration
26 Click OK to finish the calibrating of the camera.
27 Right-click on the Item1 in the tree view
Cell and select Setting .
28 Click to select Test1 in the Vision Models and click Geometric to open the geometric window.
xx1900000648
29 In the Image part, click Live to get and show new images continuously, or click
Acquire to get one new image. To use an image from file or save the current image, click Import or Export .
xx1900000530 xx1900000649
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
357
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
30 Click Define to open the train shape of the item1.
Note/Illustration
31 Drag the train shape center point to the item's center.
xx1900000650 xx1800001708
32 Click Train to open the train shape of the item1.
xx1900000651
33 Click OK to close and save the PatMax model.
34 Click Ok to close and save the Item1 setting .
35 Right-click on the Item2 in the tree view
Cell and select Setting .
Continues on next page
358 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
36 Click to select Test1 in the Vision Models and click Geometric to open the geometric window.
Note/Illustration xx1900000530
37 In the Image part, click Live to get and show new images continuously, or click
Acquire to get one new image. To use an image from file or save the current image, click Import or Export .
xx1900000649
38 Click Define to finish the train.
xx1900000650
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
359
5 Production examples
5.3 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Continued
Action
39 Drag the train shape center point to the item's center.
Note/Illustration
Production xx1800001708
40 Click Train to open the train shape of the item2.
xx1900000651
41 Click OK to close and save the PatMax model.
42 Click Ok to close and save the Item2 setting .
For detail procedure on production, see
.
360 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.1 AckItmTgt - Acknowledge an item target
6 RAPID reference
6.1 Instructions
6.1.1 AckItmTgt - Acknowledge an item target
Usage
AckItmTgt is used to acknowledge that an itmtgt received with GetItmTgt from an item source has been used (For example, handled by the robot, skipped or put back in the queue for later usage). Normally, acknowledge is setup as a
TriggL event on the path (using the
Ack or
Nack triggdata from sourcedata) to make sure acknowledge does not occur before any movements related to the target has been finished. However, if the received itmtgt shall be skipped or put back in the queue for later usage, movements related to the target may not be needed.
Then it is convenient to use this instruction instead. Only after the acknowledge has been made, a new itmtgt can be fetched from the item source.
Basic example
VAR itmtgt PlaceTarget;
GetItmTgt ItmSrcData{Index}.ItemSource, PlaceItem;
AckItmTgt ItmSrcData{Index}.ItemSource, PlaceItem, FALSE
\Skip:=TRUE;
Arguments
AckItmTgt ItemSource ItemTarget Acknowledge [\Skip] [\Type]
ItemSource
Data type: itmsrc
The item source from where the item target has been received with GetItmTgt .
ItemTarget
Data type: itmtgt
The item target to acknowledge.
Acknowledge
Data type: bool
The status of acknowledge. TRUE if the itmtgt has been handled (picked or placed)by the robot and FALSE otherwise, in which case the itmtgt is put back into the queue.
Skip
Data type: bool
Indicates if the itmtgt shall be skipped. If set to TRUE it will not be possible to receive the itmtgt again with GetItmTgt . If combined with Acknowledge =
FALSE the itmtgt will be passed on for possible handling by downstream robots.
If combined with Acknowledge = TRUE, skip will have no effect. If Skip is set to
FALSE the itmtgt will either be considered as handled by the robot (when
Continues on next page
361 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.1 AckItmTgt - Acknowledge an item target
Continued combined with
Acknowledge
= TRUE), or put back in the queue for later usage
(when combined with Acknowledge = FALSE).
Type
Data type: num
Modifies the type of the itmtgt . If combined with Acknowledge = FALSE and
Skip = TRUE, the item will be passed on to downstream robots according to the configured distribution of the new item type.
If combined with Acknowledge = FALSE and Skip = FALSE, the item will be put back in the queue with the new item type and can still be received with GetItmTgt .
The item type will only be changed locally; the item type and the distribution of the item will not change for downstream robots.
If combined with Acknowledge = TRUE, type change will have no effect.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. The errors can be handled in an error handler. The system variable ERRNO will be set to:
Error code
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF
Description itmsrc undefined.
Limitations
The itmtgt must be received with the instruction GetItmTgt .
Syntax
AckItmTgt
[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc>,
[ItemTarget ':=' ] <var or pers (INOUT) of itmtgt>,
[Acknowledge':=' ] <expression (IN) of bool>,
[\Skip ':=' ] <expression (IN) of bool>,
[\Type ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>;
Related information
For information about
The data type itmtgt
See
itmtgt - Item target data on page 384 .
362 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.2 FlushItmSrc - Flush an item source
6.1.2 FlushItmSrc - Flush an item source
Usage
FlushItmSrc is used to flush an item source. The instruction clears the item source buffers, sets the scene number to one and flushes the encoder board.
Basic example
FlushItmSrc PlaceSource;
Flushes the earlier created item source object PlaceSource .
Arguments
ItemSource
FlushItmSrc ItemSource
Data type: itmsrc
The created item source.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. The errors can be handled in an error handler. The system variable
ERRNO will be set to:
Error code
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF
Description itmsrc undefined
Limitations
To avoid potential problems, this instruction should be executed only when the last item target definitely has been acknowledged.
Syntax
FlushItmSrc
[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc>;
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
363
6 RAPID reference
6.1.3 GetItmTgt - Get the next item target
6.1.3 GetItmTgt - Get the next item target
Usage
GetItmTgt is used to get the next available itmtgt in the item source queue between the enter and the exit limit of the work area. The RAPID program waits in this instruction until the next item is possible to reach or the timeout occurs.
Basic examples
Basic examples of the instruction GetItmTgt are illustrated below.
Example 1
GetItmTgt PlaceSource, PlaceItem;
Receives a place item from the PlaceSource when there is one that can be used.
Example 2
...
VAR selectiondata neg_y_sort; neg_y_sort.ShapeType:=BOX; neg_y_sort.ConsiderType:=BitOr(ITEMS_TO_USE,ITEMS_BYPASS); neg_y_sort.GeometricData.x:=60; neg_y_sort.GeometricData.y:=500; neg_y_sort.GeometricData.z:=10; neg_y_sort.GeometricData.radius:=0; neg_y_sort.Offset.OffsetRelation:=FRAME_COORD_DIR; neg_y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.trans.x:=0; neg_y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.trans.y:=-500; neg_y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.trans.z:=0; neg_y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q1:=1; neg_y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q2:=0; neg_y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q3:=0; neg_y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q4:=0;
IF pick_type = 2 THEN pick_type := 1; ELSE pick_type := 2
ENDIF
GetItmTgt PickSource, PickItem \ItemType:=pick_type \Limit:=100
\Selection:=neg_y_sort;
Retrieves a pick item from the PickSource with negative y-sorting and type request.
The type is alternating between two types. The
Limit argument tells from where to start the search.
In the example graphic below, the sorting is in positive x-direction, negative y-direction, and operating on two different object types. The two object types should
Continues on next page
364 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.3 GetItmTgt - Get the next item target
Continued be chosen in an alternating pattern starting with the circular. This will give the order as numbered 1-10 in the graphic.
xx0900000451
A
B
C
D
E
1-10
Enter
Check limit
Exit
Product flow direction
Sort direction
Sort order
Arguments
ItemSource
ItemTarget
[\MaxTime]
GetItmTgt ItemSource, ItemTarget [\MaxTime] [\TimeFlag] [\ItemType]
[\Limit] [\SortData] [\Selection] [\Val1Min] [\Val1Max]
[\Val2Min] [\Val2Max] [\Val3Min] [\Val3Max] [\Val4Min]
[\Val4Max] [\Val5Min] [\Val5Max]
Data type: itmsrc
The item source from which the item target should be received.
Data type: itmtgt
The received item target.
Data type: num
The maximum waiting time permitted, expressed in seconds. If this time runs out before the item target is retrieved and no TimeOut flag is given, the error handler
Continues on next page
365 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.3 GetItmTgt - Get the next item target
Continued will be called with the error code
ERR_PPA_TIMEOUT
. If there is no error handler, the execution will be stopped.
[\TimeFlag]
Data type: bool
The output parameter that contains the value TRUE if the maximum permitted waiting time runs out before an item target is received. If this parameter is included in the instruction, it is not considered to be an error if the max time runs out. This argument is ignored if the MaxTime argument is not included in the instruction.
[\ItemType]
Data type: num
Specifies which item type number is requested. The instruction waits until an item target with the requested type number is available to be executed.
[\Limit]
Data type: num
Modifies the distance from where the item target is received. The instruction will return the next item target above this limit. If this argument is excluded, the instruction will return the next item target above the exit limit.
The distance is specified in millimeters from the center of the robot. The value is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, in the moving direction of the feeder. This argument is only valid when a conveyor is used.
[\SortData]
Data type: sortdata
This data structure defines how the items shall be sorted.
[\Selection]
Data type: selectiondata
This data structure defines how the items are selected.
[\Val1Min]
Data type: num
Specifies minimum value for itmtgt parameter Val1. The instruction waits until an item target fulfilling this condition is available for execution.
[\Val1Max]
Data type: num
Specifies maximum value for itmtgt parameter Val1. The instruction waits until an item target fulfilling this condition is available for execution.
[\Val2Min]
Data type: num
Specifies minimum value for itmtgt parameter Val2. The instruction waits until an item target fulfilling this condition is available for execution.
[\Val2Max]
Data type: num
Continues on next page
366 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.3 GetItmTgt - Get the next item target
Continued
Specifies maximum value for itmtgt parameter Val2. The instruction waits until an item target fulfilling this condition is available for execution.
[\Val3Min]
Data type: num
Specifies minimum value for itmtgt parameter Val3. The instruction waits until an item target fulfilling this condition is available for execution.
[\Val3Max]
Data type: num
Specifies maximum value for itmtgt parameter Val3. The instruction waits until an item target fulfilling this condition is available for execution.
[\Val4Min]
Data type: num
Specifies minimum value for itmtgt parameter Val4. The instruction waits until an item target fulfilling this condition is available for execution.
[\Val4Max]
Data type: num
Specifies maximum value for itmtgt parameter Val4. The instruction waits until an item target fulfilling this condition is available for execution.
[\Val5Min]
Data type: num
Specifies minimum value for itmtgt parameter Val5. The instruction waits until an item target fulfilling this condition is available for execution.
[\Val5Max]
Data type: num
Specifies maximum value for itmtgt parameter Val5. The instruction waits until an item target fulfilling this condition is available for execution.
Program execution
If there is no item target in buffer or any item targets available in the working area, the program execution waits in this instruction until an item is considered as inside the working area.
If the MaxTime argument is specified then the wait time is supervised. If the waiting time exceeds the value of MaxTime and the TimeFlag argument is used, then the program will continue. If TimeFlag is not used, then an error is raised. If TimeFlag is specified, it will be set to TRUE if the time is exceeded, otherwise it will be set to
FALSE
.
The
Limit argument modifies the limit from where the item target shall be received.
If the SortData argument is specified the instruction will return the item target that is the closest to the exit limit in x-direction and depending of the absence of other objects in direction of the sorting, the first object in the sort direction will be selected. The CheckBoundry distance defines the required clearance distance
Continues on next page
367 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.3 GetItmTgt - Get the next item target
Continued around an object. The sorting will check both upwards and downwards the production flow for presence of other item targets. If this argument is combined with the Limit argument the sorting algorithm will also take all objects between the limit and the exit limit into consideration when checking the safety distance for the nearest objects. If more than one robot is used in a shared position source system, that is load balancing or
ATC
, we strongly recommend using the
Selection argument instead with a proper selection data, as SortData does not take items that are bypassing in consideration when sorting.
If the
Selection argument is specified, the instruction will return the item target that is the closest to the exit limit in x-direction, which has no other item targets inside the specified shape. If this argument is combined with the Limit argument the selection algorithm will also take all objects between the limit and the exit limit into consideration when checking the distance for the nearest objects. This is highly recommended to avoid collisions.
If values are specified for the optional arguments Va1Xmin or Va1Xmax , the instruction will return an item target that fulfills the required maximum and minimum values for
Va1X
.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. The errors can be handled in an error handler. The system variable ERRNO will be set to:
Error code
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF
ERR_PPA_TIMEOUT
Description itmsrc undefined.
Timeout without any error flag.
Syntax
GetItmTgt
[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc>,
[ItemTarget ':=' ] <var or pers (INOUT) of itmtgt>
[\MaxTime ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\TimeFlag ':=' ] <var or pers (INOUT) of bool>
[\ItemType ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\Limit ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\SortData ':=' ] <expression (IN) of sortdata>
[\Selection ':=' ] <expression (IN) of selectiondata>
[\Val1Min ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\Val1Max ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\Val2Min ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\Val2Max ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\Val3Min ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\Val3Max ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\Val4Min ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\Val4Max ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\Val5Min ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\Val5Max ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>;
Continues on next page
368 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Related information
For information about
The data type itmtgt
The data type selectiondata
The data type sortdata
6 RAPID reference
6.1.3 GetItmTgt - Get the next item target
Continued
See
itmtgt - Item target data on page 384 .
selectiondata - Selection data on page 387 .
sortdata - Sort data on page 390
.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
369
6 RAPID reference
6.1.4 NextItmTgtType - Get the type of the next item target
6.1.4 NextItmTgtType - Get the type of the next item target
Usage
NextItmTgtType is used to get the type of the next item target ( itmtgt
) in the item source buffer. If the Limit distance parameter is given, the instruction will return the type of the next item target above the limit. The RAPID program waits in this instruction until there is an item in this queue.
Basic examples
NextItmTgtType PlaceSource, PlaceType
Retrieves the type of the next itmtgt in the PlaceSource .
Arguments
ItemSource
NextItmTgtType ItemSource ItemType [\Limit] [\MaxTime] [\TimeFlag]
Data type: itmsrc
The item source that the item target type should be retrieved from.
ItemType
Data type: num
The retrieved item target type.
[\Limit]
Data type: num
This is the limit from where the type is retrieved. The instruction will return the type of the next item target above this limit. If this argument is excluded, the instruction will return the type of the next item target above the exit limit.
The distance is calculated in millimeters from the center of the robot. The value is positive if the limit is beyond the center of the robot, in the moving direction of the conveyor.
This argument is only valid when a conveyor is used.
[\MaxTime]
Data type: num
The maximum waiting time permitted, expressed in seconds. If this time runs out before the item target is retrieved and no
TimeOut flag is given, the error handler will be called with the error code ERR_PPA_TIMEOUT . If there is no error handler, the execution is stopped.
[\TimeFlag]
Data type: bool
The output parameter that contains the value TRUE if the maximum permitted waiting time runs out before an item target is retrieved. If this parameter is included in the instruction it is not considered to be an error if the max time runs out.
This argument is only used if the MaxTime argument is used.
Continues on next page
370 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.4 NextItmTgtType - Get the type of the next item target
Continued
Program execution
If there is no item target in buffer or any item targets above the Limit , the program execution waits in this instruction until there is an item in the buffer.
If the
MaxTime argument is specified then the wait time is supervised. If the waiting time exceeds the value of MaxTime and the TimeFlag argument is used, then the program will continue. If
TimeFlag is not used, then an error is raised. If
TimeFlag is specified, this will be set to TRUE if the time is exceeded, otherwise it will be set to FALSE.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. The errors can be handled in an error handler. The system variable ERRNO will be set to:
Error code
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF
ERR_PPA_TIMEOUT
Description itmsrc undefined.
Timeout without any error flag
Syntax
NextItmTgtType
[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc>,
[ItemType ':=' ] <var or pers (INOUT) of num>
[\Limit ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\MaxTime ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\TimeFlag ':=' ] <var or pers (INOUT) of bool>;
Related information
For information about
The data type itmtgt
See
itmtgt - Item target data on page 384 .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
371
6 RAPID reference
6.1.5 QStartItmSrc - Start queue in item source
6.1.5 QStartItmSrc - Start queue in item source
Usage
QStartItmSrc is used to start the queue in an item source. This instruction must be used when starting a new program or after flushing.
Basic example
QStartItmSrc PlaceSource;
The queue of objects in the item source PlaceSource is started.
Arguments
QStartItmSrc ItemSource
ItemSource
Data type: itmsrc
The started item source.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. The errors can be handled in an error handler. The system variable
ERRNO will be set to:
Error code
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF
Description itmsrc undefined
Syntax
QStartItmSrc
[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc>;
Related information
For information about
The instruction QStopItmSrc
See
QStopItmSrc - Stop queue in item source on page 373 .
372 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.6 QStopItmSrc - Stop queue in item source
6.1.6 QStopItmSrc - Stop queue in item source
Usage
QStopItmSrc is used to stop the queue in an item source.
Basic example
QStopItmSrc PlaceSource;
The queue of objects in the item source PlaceSource is stopped.
Arguments
QStopItmSrc ItemSource
ItemSource
Data type: itmsrc
The stopped item source.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. The errors can be handled in an error handler. The system variable
ERRNO will be set to:
Error code
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF
Description itmsrc undefined
Syntax
QStopItmSrc
[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc>;
Related information
For information about
The instruction QStartItmSrc
See
QStartItmSrc - Start queue in item source on page 372 .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
373
6 RAPID reference
6.1.7 ResetFlowCount - Reset flow counter
6.1.7 ResetFlowCount - Reset flow counter
Usage
ResetFlowCount is used to reset the flow counter. The flow counter indicates the number of objects that has passed the exit limit of a conveyor work area since last reset. The value of the flow counter can be retreived with the function
GetFlowCount
Basic example
ResetFlowCount PlaceSource;
Resets the flow counter for an item source.
Arguments
ResetFlowCount ItemSource
ItemSource
Data type: itmsrc
The item source.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. The errors can be handled in an errorhandler. The system variable ERRNO will be set to:
Error code
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF
Description itmsrc undefined
Syntax
ResetFlowCount[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc>;
Related information
For information about
The function GetFlowCount
See
GetFlowCount - Get number of passed items on page 383
.
374 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.8 ResetMaxUsageTime - Reset max measured usage time
RobotWare - OS
6.1.8 ResetMaxUsageTime - Reset max measured usage time
Description
ResetMaxUsageTime is used to reset the maximum measured usage time of the previously handled objects. This is the time between receiving a target with
GetItmTgt , until the object is handled by the robot (acknowledge time).
ResetMaxUsageTime is only available with the PickMaster Ready .
Example
ResetMaxUsageTime ItmSrcData{PickWorkArea{1}}.ItemSource;
Resets the maximum usage time for an item source.
Arguments
Item Source
ResetMaxUsageTime ItemSource
ItemSource
Data type: itmsrc
The item source.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors are generated. They are handled in an error handler. The system variable
ERRNO will be set to:
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF The itmsrc is undefined.
Syntax
ResetMaxUsageTime[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc>;
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
375
6 RAPID reference
6.1.9 UseReachableTargets - Use reachable targets
RobotWare - OS
6.1.9 UseReachableTargets - Use reachable targets
Description
UseReachableTargets is used to activate a functional mode, where the robot only receives reachable targets for object handling. When activated, non-reachable targets are filtered out for target requests with GetItmTgt , see Application manual - PickMaster 3 .
UseReachableTargets sets an optimal target release zone with a variable size. The size of the release zone depends on the robot’s reach and the real-time speed of the conveyor. When the conveyor speed increases, the size of the release zone decreases, thereby decreasing the amount of targets available for use. If the conveyor speed is too high, the release zone disappears completely and no targets will be received until the speed is reduced.
UseReachableTargets is available only with the PickMaster Ready option.
WARNING
The target release zone depends on the selection of the enter/exit limits, see
Application manual - PickMaster 3 . The resulting target release zone will be the intersection of the optimal target release zone and the enter/exit region.
The recommended exit/enter values to avoid any impact on the optimal target zone are as follows:
• Enter = -10000 mm (this signifies, a distance well outside the robot reach in an upstream direction)
• Exit = 10000 mm (this signifies, a distance well outside the robot reach in a downstream direction)
The following figure shows the target release zone for an IRB 360 (as seen from above) at 4 different conveyor speeds. The light blue area is the working range of the robot and the green area is the target release zone.
xx1800000383
Example
UseReachableTargets ItmSrcData{PlaceWorkArea{1}}.ItemSource, TRUE,
0.7 \ReleaseTime:=0.1;
GetItmTgt PlaceSource, PlaceItem;
Activate UseReachableTargets in the place work area of a linear conveyor. The targets in use are expected to be placed within a maximum time of 0.7 seconds after being received with GetItmTgt . Targets become available for use 0.1 second
Continues on next page
376 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.9 UseReachableTargets - Use reachable targets
RobotWare - OS
Continued before they enter robot reach. Then, the targets remain available for use until they leave the release zone.
Arguments
UseReachableTargets ItemSource, Enable, UsageTime [\ReleaseTime]
Item Source
ItemSource
Data type: itmsrc
The item source where UseReachableTargets is activated.
Enable
Enable
Data type: bool
This activates/deactivates UseReachableTargets .
Usage Time
UsageTime
Data type: num
The expected usage time of the targets. This is the time between receiving the target with GetItmTgt , until the object is handled (for example picked) by the robot
(acknowledge time). The actual usage time is continuously measured and the maximum measured usage time can be received with GetMaxUsageTime . To avoid reach errors, the UsageTime value should be defined as a sum of the maximum measured usage time and a margin. For example, set UsageTime = Maximum measured usage time + 0.1 second. The drawback of having a large safety margin is an unnecessary reduction of the target release zone, which may decrease the pick rate.
[\ReleaseTime]
Release Time
Data type: num
The ReleaseTime defines the time when the targets enter the release zone, before entering robot reach. If the value is negative, targets enter the release zone after they enter robot reach. A value of 0.1 or less is recommended to avoid reach errors.
A higher value can be useful to handle high speed conveyors. The drawback of a higher value is an increasing risk of having upstream reach errors at low speeds.
Note
It is possible to change UsageTime or ReleaseTime at any time. For example, a temporary reduction in the robot speed requires a longer usage time to avoid reach errors.
Syntax
UseReachableTargets
[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc>,
[Enable ':=' ] <var or pers (IN) of bool>
Continues on next page
377 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.1.9 UseReachableTargets - Use reachable targets
RobotWare - OS
Continued
[UsageTime ':=' ] <var or pers (IN) of num>
[\ReleaseTime ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>;
Limitations
If the robot work area is limited in motion configuration, there is a possibility that targets upto 20 mm outside of the working area perpendicular to the conveyor moving direction, may be retrieved by the GetItmTgt instruction.
A work around to avoid the outside reach errors is to put an extra check on the
Y-value of the itemtarget before moving towards it.
378 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.2.1 GetMaxUsageTime - Get max measured usage time
RobotWare - OS
6.2 Functions
6.2.1 GetMaxUsageTime - Get max measured usage time
Description
GetMaxUsageTime is used to get the maximum measured usage time of the previously handled objects. It is the time between receiving a target with GetItmTgt , until the object is handled by the robot (acknowledge time). The actual usage time is continuously measured for each handled object.
GetMaxUsageTime is only available with the PickMaster Ready
Example
VAR num usetime; usetime := GetMaxUsageTime(ItmSrcData{PickWorkArea{1}}.ItemSource); usetime is the the maximum measured usage time since starting production or since executing ResetMaxUsageTime .
Return value
Data type: num
The maximum measured usage time since starting production or since executing
ResetMaxUsageTime .
Arguments
Item Source
GetMaxUsageTime (ItemSource)
ItemSource
Data type: itmsrc
The item source.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. They can be handled in an error handler. The system variable ERRNO will be set to:
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF The itmsrc is undefined.
Syntax
GetMaxUsageTime '('[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc>
')';
This function returns the value of the data in num type.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
379
6 RAPID reference
6.2.2 GetQueueLevel - Get queue level
6.2.2 GetQueueLevel - Get queue level
Usage
GetQueueLevel is used to get current number of item targets in an item source fulfilling certain conditions.
Basic example reg1 := GetQueueLevel(PlaceSource); reg1 is assigned the current number of item targets in the item source
PlaceSource .
Return value
Data type: num
The current number of item targets in the item source.
Arguments
GetQueueLevel (ItemSource [\ItmType] [\MinLimit] [\MaxLimit])
ItemSource
Data type: itmsrc
The item source that the current number of item targets should be retrieved from.
\ItmType
Data type: num
Only items of the specified type number will be counted.
\MinLimit
Data type: num
Defines the minimum distance to the robot center from where an item will be counted. A negative value indicates that the limit is upstreams from the robot center. A positive value indicates that the limit is downstreams. The parameters does not affect indexed work areas.
\MaxLimit
Data type: num
Defines the maximum distance to the robot center from where an item will be counted. A negative value indicates that the limit is upstreams from the robot center. A positive value indicates that the limit is downstreams. The parameter does not affect indexed work areas.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. The errors can be handled in an error handler. The system variable ERRNO will be set to:
Error code
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF
Description itmsrc undefined
Continues on next page
380 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Syntax
6 RAPID reference
6.2.2 GetQueueLevel - Get queue level
Continued
GetQueueLevel '('
[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc> ')'
[\ItmType ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\MinLimit ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>
[\MaxLimit ':=' ] <expression (IN) of num>;
A function with a return value of the data type num .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
381
6 RAPID reference
6.2.3 GetQueueTopLevel - Get queue top level
6.2.3 GetQueueTopLevel - Get queue top level
Usage
GetQueueTopLevel is used to get the maximum number of item targets that simultaneously have been in the buffer of an item source.
Basic examples reg1 := GetQueueTopLevel(PlaceSource); reg1 is assigned the maximum number of item targets that simultaneously have been in the item source PlaceSource .
Return value
Data type: num
The maximum number of item targets that simultaneously have been in the item source.
Arguments
ItemSource
GetQueueTopLevel (ItemSource)
Data type: itmsrc
The item source that the current number of item targets should be retrieved from.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. The errors can be handled in an error handler. The system variable ERRNO will be set to:
Error code
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF
Description itmsrc undefined
Syntax
GetQueueTopLevel '('
[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc> ')';
A function with a return value of the data type num .
382 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.2.4 GetFlowCount - Get number of passed items
6.2.4 GetFlowCount - Get number of passed items
Usage
GetFlowCount is used to get the total number of items that has passed the exit limit of a conveyor work area since ResetFlowCount was executed. Items that the robot handles will not be counted (even if they pass the exit limit before picking/placing occurs).
Basic example
VAR num counter;
ResetFlowcount PlaceSource;
WaitTime 10; counter := GetFlowCount(PlaceSource); counter is assigned the number of items originating from PlaceSource that has passed the exit limit.
Return value
Data type: num
The number of items that has passed the exit limit since
ResetFlowCount was executed.
Arguments
GetFlowCount (ItemSource)
ItemSource
Data type: itmsrc
The item souce.
Error handling
The following recoverable errors can be generated. The errors can be handled in an errorhandler. The system variable ERRNO will be set to:
Error code
ERR_ITMSRC_UNDEF
Description itmsrc undefined
Syntax
GetFlowCount '('[ItemSource ':=' ] <variable (VAR) of itmsrc> ')';
A function returns value of the data type num.
Related information
For information about
The instruction ResetFlowCount
See
ResetFlowCount - Reset flow counter on page 374 .
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
383
6 RAPID reference
6.3.1 itmtgt - Item target data
6.3 Data types
6.3.1 itmtgt - Item target data
Usage itmtgt is used to describe one pick or place item.
Description
Itmtgt identifies an item to pick or place. It contains the position and some additional data.
Components tag
Data type: num
Sequential number identifying the item. Can be modified by a user hook for free usage. Is restricted to integer values.
type
Data type: num
Type of item.
scene
Data type: num
Sequential number identifying the scene, corresponding for example to a picture taken by the vision system.
robtgt
Data type: robtgt
The pick or place position.
val1
Data type: num
Optional. Can be used to carry additional item specific information, for example, from a user hook. It is of data type float.
val2
Data type: num
Optional. Can be used to carry additional item specific information, for example, from a user hook. It is of data type float.
val3
Data type: num
Optional. Can be used to carry additional item specific information, for example, from a user hook. It is of data type float.
val4
Data type: num
Continues on next page
384 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
val5
6 RAPID reference
6.3.1 itmtgt - Item target data
Continued
Optional. Can be used to carry additional item specific information, for example, from a user hook. It is of data type float.
Data type: num
Optional. Can be used to carry additional item specific information, for example, from a user hook. It is of data type float.
Examples
Example 1
Structure
CONST itmtgt pickpos :=
[1,2,1,0,0,0,0,0,[[20,40,8],[1,0,0,0],[0,0,0,0],
[9E+9,9E+9,9E+9,9E+9,0,0]]];
A pick position is defined. The external axis related to the used conveyors must be set to zero, that is not marked as unused (by stating 9E+9). Example: if you have two conveyors, set the two last external axis positions to zero.
<dataobject of itmtgt>
<tag of num>
<type of num>
<scene of num>
<val1 of num>
<val2 of num>
<val3 of num>
<val4 of num>
<val5 of num>
<dataobject of robtarget>
<trans of pos>
<x of num>
<y of num>
<z of num>
<rot of orient>
<q1 of num>
<q2 of num>
<q3 of num>
<q4 of num>
<robconf of confdata>
<cf1 of num>
<cf4 of num>
<cf6 of num>
<cfx of num>
<extax of extjoint>
<eax_a of num>
<eax_b of num>
<eax_c of num>
<eax_d of num>
<eax_e of num>
<eax_f of num>
Continues on next page
385 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.3.1 itmtgt - Item target data
Continued
Related information
For information about
Positioning instructions
Coordinate systems
Handling configuration data
Configuration of external axes
What is a quaternion?
See
Technical reference manual - RAPID Overview
Technical reference manual - RAPID Overview
Technical reference manual - RAPID Overview
Technical reference manual - System parameters
Technical reference manual - RAPID Overview
386 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.3.2 selectiondata - Selection data
6.3.2 selectiondata - Selection data
Usage selectiondata is used to describe the selection criteria. It is also used to describe item sorting.
Description selectiondata is used to set the criteria for sorting and clearance area when retrieving item targets from an item source.
Components
ShapeType
Data type: shapetype
Specifies the shape of the clearance area that should be used.
• SHAPE_UNDEFINED specifies that no selection is used.
•
BOX specifies that there must be a clear box shape around the item target position where no other item targets are present.
• CYLINDER specifies there must be a clear cylinder shape around the item target position where no other item targets are present.
• SPHERE specifies that there must be a clear sphere shape around the item target position where no other item targets are present.
ConsiderType
Data type: aconsidertype
Specifies which items in the queue that should be taken in consideration when selecting.
• ITEMS_TO_USE specifies that only items marked for use by this queue are considered in the selection.
• ITEMS_BYPASS specifies that only items marked to pass by this queue are considered in the selection.
• ITEMS_PICKED specifies that only items marked as already picked, by this queue or by a former queue in the line, are considered in the selection.
• ITEMS_PLACED specifies that only items marked as already placed, by this queue or by a former queue in the line, are considered in the selection.
If items with different marks should be taken into consideration when selecting an item, then use a bit-or operation with the consideration types. (RAPID function
BitOr(<byte>,<byte>)
.)
GeometricData
Data type: geodata
The data that defines the geometric shape dimensions (x, y, z and radius).
• A BOX shape is defined by the x, y, and z-values.
• A CYLINDER shape is defined by the radius value and the height is defined by the z-value.
Continues on next page
387 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.3.2 selectiondata - Selection data
Continued
• A
SPHERE shape is defined by the radius value.
The orientation of the shape’s coordinate system is defined by the offset data component. By default it is the coordinate system of the shape aligned to the workobject or conveyor frame. Note that all shapes origin are placed in the center of the shape and the values are the distance to every plane in both positive and negative direction. That is, if a box is defined as x: 10, y: 15 and z: 20 the box will have a size of 20 mm in x-direction, 30 mm in y-direction and 40 in z-direction. If no offset is used the check for other items in range will be done 10 mm before, 10 mm after, 15 mm left of, 15 mm right of, 20 mm above, and 20 mm underneath every item.
Offset
Data type: offsetdata
The offset consists of OffsetRelation ( offsetreltype ) and OffsetPose
( pose
).
The OffsetRelation can be of two different types.
•
FRAME_COORD_DIR indicates that the rotation in the
OffsetPose is relative to the workobject or conveyor frame coordinate system.
• ITEM_COORD_DIR indicates that the rotation in the OffsetPose is relative to the item coordinate system of the item to check.
The OffsetPose is used to move the center of the shape away from the item position, for example, if the grip position of the item is not at the center of real object to pick.
Examples
VAR selectiondata clear_rect:= [BOX,ITEMS_TO_USE,[22,15,5,0],
[FRAME_COORD_DIR,[[0,7,0],[1,0,0,0]]]];
Limitations
The orientation must be normalized; that is the sum of the squares must equal 1.
q1
2
+ q2
2
+ q3
2
+ q4
2
= 1
Structure
Continues on next page
388
<dataobject of selectiondata>
<ShapeType of shapetype>
<ConsiderType of considertype>
<GeometricData of geodata>
<x of num>
<y of num>
<z of num>
<radius of num>
<Offset of offsetdata>
<OffsetRelation of offsetreltype>
<OffsetPose of pose>
<trans of pos>
<x of num>
<y of num>
<z of num>
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.3.2 selectiondata - Selection data
Continued
<rot of orient>
<q1 of num>
<q2 of num>
<q3 of num>
<q4 of num>
Related information
For information about
The data type pose
The function BitOr
What is a quaternion?
Example using selectiondata
See
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types .
Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types .
Technical reference manual - RAPID Overview .
Example: Selecting item depending on clearance zone on page 412
.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
389
6 RAPID reference
6.3.3 sortdata - Sort data
6.3.3 sortdata - Sort data
Usage sortdata is used to describe the sorting criteria.
Description sortdata is used to set the criteria for sorting item targets from an item source.
Components
SortType
Data type: sorttype
Type of sorting that is going to be used.
•
UNSORT_TYPE tells that no sorting is used.
• POS_Y_SORT_TYPE tells that the sorting shall be done from the positive y-direction of the work area.
• NEG_Y_SORT_TYPE tells that the sorting shall be done from the negative y-direction of the work area.
CheckBoundary
Data type: num
The clearance distance for sorting, in millimeters. The distance is defined as the minimum distance to the next item in the sorting direction.
SortDirOffset
Data type: num
An offset distance beyond the item target in the sort direction. Is used to define the inner limit for the corridor in which no other item targets are allowed.
Examples
VAR sortdata y_sort:=[NEG_Y_SORT_TYPE ,78, 52];
Structure
<dataobject of sortdata>
<SortType of sorttype>
<CheckBoundary of num>
<SortDirOffset of num>
390 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.4.1 RAPID programs
6.4 RAPID program
6.4.1 RAPID programs
Introduction
Overview
Each robot has a default RAPID program that can be edited using a normal text editor from the robot settings of the job dialog. When a job is started, the program is downloaded by PickMaster in the picking controller. The program contains the
Main routine where the program execution starts.
Note
Due to the download procedure, this program cannot be modified directly on the robot system.
The installation contains the following program template files:
Template
PMppa360_IRC5.prg
Customized for
Four axes FlexPicker IRB 360.
PMppa360_IRC5_MM2.prg
Four axes FlexPicker IRB 360. To be used for a second multi move robot.
PMppa360_IRC5_DoublePick.prg
Four axes FlexPicker IRB 360. Adapted for double pick, single place.
PMppa360_IRC5_6_02.prg
Four axes FlexPicker IRB 360. To be used with Robot-
Ware 6.02.
PMppa360_IRC5_6_02_DoublePick.pr
g Four axes FlexPicker IRB 360. Adapted for double pick, single place. To be used with RobotWare 6.02.
PMppa_6Axes_IRC5.prg
PMppa_6Axes_IRC5_6_02.prg
Six axes robots of articulated arm type, for example,
IRB 120.
Six axes robots of articulated arm type, for example,
IRB 120. To be used with RobotWare 6.09.
Template
PMppa360_OmniCore
Customized for
Four axes FlexPicker IRB 360.
PMppa360_OmniCore_DoublePick Four axes FlexPicker IRB 360. Adapted for double pick, single place.
PMppa_6Axes_OmniCore Six axes robots of articulated arm type, for example,
IRB 120.
Program execution - General
The RAPID program is loaded and started from the Main routine by PickMaster when a new job is started.
For every cycle, the default RAPID program performs:
• a pick on a pick work area.
• a place on a place work area.
Continues on next page
391 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.4.1 RAPID programs
Continued
If there are more than one pick work area with a robot, it uses the one having the lowest configured work area index. If there are more than one place work area with a robot, it uses the one having the lowest configured work area index. The RAPID program can be modified to implement another sequence, for example, to double pick with single place.
Program execution – Work areas
In RAPID, a work area is always associated with an item source object. The item source is sometimes referred to as a queue. The item source holds all target positions related to this work area. Target positions are continuously received in the item source, while being detected with the associated flow handler sensor.
Program execution – Target positions
For each pick, a pick target is fetched from the pick item source. The target position gives the location of the next item to be picked.
For each place, a place target is fetched from the place item source. The target position gives the location of the next empty place location for the item to be placed.
Movements
The RAPID program is built with six different movements.
For a six axis robot, the following two intermediate points must be used:
• Between position 3 and position 4.
• Between position 6 and the next loop’s position 1.
xx0800000326
The following six movements are included.
1
2
Description
Approach position above the pick target.
The distance above the pick target is the pick elevation value, in negative z-direction of the tool, given in the Work Area Properties dialog in the job dialog. The target is of corner path type and the vacuum activation occasion is calculated as the time before the middle of the corner path. The time is entered in the Work Area Properties dialog.
This is the pick target.
The robot TCP is coordinated relative to the conveyor during the pick time entered in the Work Area Properties dialog. The TCP follows the pick target during the pick time.
Continues on next page
392 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.4.1 RAPID programs
Continued
3
4
5
6
Description
Last position in the pick sequence.
The distance above the pick target is calculated in the same way as the approach position.
The position is coordinated to the conveyor until the middle of the corner path.
Therefore the used item target must be acknowledged, so the item source can start tracking the next item target in the pick work area buffer. The target cannot be a fine point.
Approach position above the place target.
The distance above the place target is the pick or place elevation value, in negative z-direction of the tool, given in the Work Area Properties dialog.
This is the place target.
The robot TCP is coordinated relative to the conveyor during the place. The moment for the vacuum reversion event is calculated as the time before the half place time.
The vacuum off moment is calculated as a time after the half place time.
Last position of the sequence.
The position is coordinated to the conveyor until the TCP passes the middle of the corner path or goes into the fine point. Therefore the used item target must be acknowledged, so the item source can start tracking the next item target in the pick work area buffer. The target cannot be a fine point.
Note
When running a pick and place cycle over moving conveyors, the RAPID program pointer runs in advance and picks out a target long before it is going to be used.
By the time the robot uses the target it may already have moved past the exit limit. RAPID moves the program pointer in advance about 100ms. In a coordinated fine point the "running in advance" is triggered at the beginning of the fine point movement as the robot locks above the conveyor. If the PickTime is long (for example, 50ms) the next target will be taken out of the queue long before (50ms) the robot is physically going to go there. If the conveyor speed is high 50ms may mean that the target to pick is already beyond the exit limit. Still the robot will try to pick it.
Program modules
The default RAPID program contains three program modules.
Module
PPAMAIN
PPASERVICE
PPAEXECUTING
Description
Handles the main program initiations and execution sequence.
Do not edit this module for customization purpose.
Contains the service routines and service variables that can be executed and set from PickMaster.
Handles the pick and place operations. Customize this module for your purposes.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
393
6 RAPID reference
6.4.1 RAPID programs
Continued
System modules
An ABB robot controller with the RobotWare option PickMaster Ready will always contain the loaded system modules ppaBase (crypted) and ppaUser (open).
Module ppaBase ppaUser
Description
Contains variables for communication with PickMaster, event routines and routines for creating, initiating, and deleting item sources.
Contains declarations of public data types and holds the work object data for indexed work areas. It also contains the declaration of default tool data, for example, PickAct1 and
PickAct2 .
Public data types
Overview
The system module ppaUser contains two record definitions, sourcedata and noncnvwobjdata .
sourcedata
The sourcedata is used in the variable array ItmSrcData . This array holds data about every item source.
The record can be extended for other purposes, but do not change or delete any component in the structure.
Name
Used
ItemSource
SourceType
Ack
Nack
SimAttach1
SimAttach2
SimDetach1
SimDetach2
VacuumAct1
VacuumAct2
VacuumRev1
VacuumRev2
VacuumOff1
VacuumOff2
Wobj
Alias bool itmsrc itmsrctype triggdata triggdata triggdata triggdata triggdata triggdata triggdata triggdata triggdata triggdata triggdata triggdata wobjdata
Description
Flag to indicate that the array index is used.
Descriptor to the item source.
Type of source, PICK_TYPE , PLACE_TYP E or
UNDEFINED_TYPE .
Triggdata for acknowledging the item targets.
Triggdata for negative acknowledging the item targets.
Triggdata for attaching a nearby item to activator 1 in simulation.
Triggdata for attaching a nearby item to activator 2 in simulation.
Triggdata for detaching an item held by activator 1 in simulation.
Triggdata for detaching an item held by activator 2 in simulation.
Triggdata for vacuum activation on real robot.
Triggdata for vacuum activation on real robot.
Triggdata for vacuum blow on real robot.
Triggdata for vacuum blow on real robot.
Triggdata for vacuum off on real robot.
Triggdata for vacuum off on real robot.
Work object data for the source
Continues on next page
394 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.4.1 RAPID programs
Continued
Name
VacActDelay
VacRevDelay
VacOffDelay
TunePos
TrackPoint
OffsZ
Alias num num num
Description
Vacuum activation delay
Vacuum reversion delay
Vacuum off delay
Position tuning for the work area.
pos stoppointdata Follow time data.
num Height for the offset point above the pick or place position.
noncnvwobjdata
The noncnvwobjdata is used in the persistent variable array NonCnvWOData . This is only used for indexed work areas. The work object data is stored in this array.
This data is then used when the item sources are created.
The record can be extended for other purposes, but do not change or delete any component in the structure.
Name
Used
NonCnvWobjName
Wobj
Alias bool string wobjdata
Description
Flag to indicate that the array index is used.
Name of the work area.
The stored work object data.
AlwaysClearPath
Clear path
The robot path is cleared before the restart when a stop occurs during a motion that is coordinated to a moving work object. Otherwise the coordinated motion continues the stored path, but the position of the object in the conveyor may have changed to a position that is out of reach by the robot.
Unconditional path clearing
The
AlwaysClearPath
(bool always) routine unconditionally clears the path before the restart, if the input parameter value is set to TRUE.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
395
6 RAPID reference
6.4.2 Variables
6.4.2 Variables
Introduction to variables
The PickMaster robot controller contains many RAPID variables. The variables are declared in both ppaBase and ppaUser . Many are not used in customized programs.
Public variables in ppaUser
Overview
The following variables in ppaUser can be used.
VAR sourcedata ItmSrcData{MaxNoSources}
This array variable keeps information about all work areas. The index given in the work area configuration is the index of the ItmSrcData array.
PERS noncnvwobjdata NonCnvWOData{MaxNoSources}:=[[…
This array variable stores the work object frames for the indexed work areas. The key to find a certain work object calibration is the name, that must be same as the name in the work area configuration.
TASK PERS tooldata PickAct1:=[…]
This tooldata is used for pick and place operations.
Note
The direction of tool must fit the direction of items that are retrieved from the queue. The target positions of the items, which are retrieved from the queue, are rotated 180 degrees around their x-axis from the defined direction.
In an installation with a hanging IRB 360 and items lying on a horizontal conveyor, the tool’s z-direction will point out from the nose and down into the conveyor, like tool0 .
Public variables in ppaBase
The following variables in ppaBase can be used.
TASK PERS num Vtcp:=1000
Used for speed adjustment from PickMaster.
TASK PERS speeddata MaxSpeed:=[…]
Highest speed used for movements.
TASK PERS speeddata LowSpeed:=[…]
Low speed used for movements.
TASK PERS speeddata VeryLowSpeed:=[…]
Lowest speed used for movements.
Continues on next page
396 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.4.2 Variables
Continued
Public variables in PickMaster template programs
The following public variables are used in the PickMaster template program.
VAR num PickWorkArea{X}:=0
The PickWorkArea array is used to specify from which work area the robot will pick an item. The pick work areas are ordered with respect to selection index.
PickWorkArea{1} has the lowest work area selection index.
PickWorkArea{2} has the second lowest selection index.
VAR num PlaceWorkArea{X}:=0
The PlaceWorkArea array is used to specify on which work area the robot will place an item. The place work areas are ordered with respect to selection index.
PlaceWorkArea{1} has the lowest work area selection index.
PlaceWorkArea{2} has the second lowest selection index.
VAR num OtherWorkArea{X}:=0
The OtherWorkArea array is used to specify to which work area the robot will go for a user defined purpose. The other work areas are ordered with respect to selection index.
OtherWorkArea{1} has the lowest work area selection index.
OtherWorkArea{2} has the second lowest selection index.
VAR itmtgt PickTarget:=[...]
Used to retrieve a pick target from a pick item source.
VAR itmtgt PlaceTarget:=[...]
Used to retrieve a place target from a place item source.
TASK PERS wobjdata WObjPick:=[…]
Holds the wobjdata for the work area. The information is moved from
ItmSrcData to WObjPick in the Pick routine because the motion instructions need to have the wobjdata as
PERS type.
TASK PERS wobjdata WObjPlace:=[…]
Holds the wobjdata for the work area. The information is moved from
ItmSrcData to WObjPlace in the Place routine because the motion instructions need to have the wobjdata as
PERS type.
TASK PERS robtarget SafePos:=[…]
Defined start position for the robot. Edit this robtarget to fit the application.
TASK PERS robtarget IntPosPickX:=[…]
Defined intermediate position for every pick work area robot. Edit this robtarget to fit each work area.
TASK PERS robtarget IntPosPlaceX:=[…]
Defined intermediate position for every place work area robot. Edit this robtarget to fit each work area.
Continues on next page
397 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.4.2 Variables
Continued
TASK PERS loaddata ItemLoad:=[…]
Load data ( loaddata ) used for pick and place operations. Edit this loaddata to fit the picked item. If different item types are used, declare one loaddata for each type. It is important that correct loaddata is used to get the best performance of the robot.
The default loaddata is the same as tooldataload0 .
398 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.4.3 Routines
6.4.3 Routines
Introduction to routines
The PickMaster RAPID modules contain many routines, some are very useful for the end user, others are only to be used internally by the PickMaster program.
Public routines in PickMaster template programs
The following public routines are available in the PickMaster template programs.
PROC main()
Start routine for the RAPID program. The program will always start from this routine.
PROC InitSafeStop()
Initiates the SafeStop trap. It must be executed at the beginning of the program execution to get a correct robot stop when the PickMaster project is paused or stopped.
PROC InitTriggs()
Sets trigger events for the vacuum activation, reversion and turning off, at the project start for every used work area index. See more at SetTriggs .
PROC InitPickTune()
Initiates the PickTune trap. Must be executed at the beginning of the project start so the work areas can be tuned.
PROC SetTriggs(num Index)
Sets trigger events for the vacuum activation, reversion and turning off. The default program only sets up events for one vacuum ejector on the I/O group goVacBlow1
.
If more than one vacuum ejector is used, the new vacuum ejector I/O group must be setup for the correct work area and the default routine must be edited to get the right vacuum ejector to each work area.
PROC InitSpeed()
Sets the robot speed used in the program. The instruction VelSet is executed in this routine, which sets the maximum allowed speed for the robot. If a six axes robot is used, this limit can be tuned to avoid motion errors.
PROC PickPlace()
Starts the item queues and initiates the final settings. The pick and place sequence is called from this routine. Do not make changes in this routine.
This routine is called when the pick and place execution is started.
PROC SafeStop()
When the project is stopped or paused this routine will be called either from the
SafeStopTrap routine or the PickPlace routine. The slow motion to the safe position is called from this routine.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
399
6 RAPID reference
6.4.3 Routines
Continued
PROC GotoRestartPos()
Runs the slow motion to the safe position and sends a negative acknowledge to all item sources. This must be done to tell the sources that the execution was interrupted.
PROC Home()
Service routine that moves the robot to the safe position.
PROC WashDown()
Wash down service routine.
PROC TestCycle()
Test service routine.
PROC Homepos()
Service routine that moves the robot to the synchronization position.
PROC EnumerateWorkAreas()
Sets up the arrays of work areas for Pick, Place, and Other.
PROC PickPlaceSeq()
Specifies the sequence of the application, that is the logic of how the robot will pick and place from different queues.
This routine is called once every loop, which is counted as one pick in the pick rate statistics shown in the PickMaster production tab.
PROC Pick(num Index)
Executes one pick. The index defines which work area the item will be picked from.
PROC Place(num Index)
Executes one place. The given index defines which work area the item will be placed on.
PROC GoInterMidP(robtarget Pos)
Executes a motion to the intermediate position Pos (Used only for six axes robots).
TRAP SafeStopTrap
Trap routine to catch the stop I/O signal. This is executed if the stop I/O signal is set before SafeStop is called from the PickPlace routine.
TRAP PickTuneTrap
Trap routine to attach the tuned values from the PickMaster to the corresponding variables.
Hidden routines in ppaBase module
Overview
Following are the hidden routines in the ppaBase module.
PROC ResetEvent()
Resets some variables. This routine is only executed in the RESET system event shelf.
Continues on next page
400 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.4.3 Routines
Continued
PROC PowerOnEvent()
Resets some variables. This routine is executed only in the POWER_ON system event shelf.
PROC StopEvent()
Clears the robot path if the robot is in a coordinated motion when the stop occurs.
This routine is only executed in the
STOP system event shelf.
PROC RestartEvent()
This routine is only executed in the
RESTART system event shelf. If the robot is currently in a coordinated motion, this routine will force the program to restart the program from the level that has an error handler for the raised error PPA_RESTART .
PROC NewSource()
Creates a new item source and initiates the ItmSrcData variable. PickMaster calls this routine for each work area when the project starts.
PROC ClearAll()
Resets all important variables and deletes all item sources. This routine is called when the project is stopped.
PROC PickRateInit()
Initiates the pick rate calculation.
PROC PickRateReset()
Resets the pick rate calculation.
PROC CheckAx4Rev ()
Checks if it is necessary to reset the fourth axis on the IRB340.
PROC ResetAx4 (VAR mecunit MechUnit)
Resets the fourth axis.
PROC NotifyClearAll ()
Tells PickMaster that ClearAll is executed.
PROC NotifySafeStop ()
Tells PickMaster that SafeStop is executed.
PROC NotifyRunning ()
Tells PickMaster that the process is running.
PROC NotifyWaitForExe ()
Tells PickMaster that the RAPID program is waiting for new order.
PROC WaitForExeOrder ()
PROC IncrPicks ()
Increments the pick calculation.
PROC ppaDropWobj(PERS wobjdata Wobj)
Encapsulates the DropWobj instruction. See Application manual - Conveyor tracking for more information
Continues on next page
401 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.4.3 Routines
Continued
PROC ppaWaitWobj(PERS wobjdata Wobj, \num RelDist \num MaxTime \bool TimeFlag)
Encapsulates the WaitWobj instruction. See Application manual - Conveyor tracking for more information
PROC ppaCnvGenInstr(VAR mecunit MechUnit, num cnvcmd, cnvgendata Data)
Encapsulates the CnvGenInstr instruction. See Application manual - Conveyor tracking for more information
PROC WalkTheData()
Traces the content of the array variables ItmSrcData and NonCnvWOData , which can be useful when trying to find an error. It prints the file TheData.log on the system directory on the controller.
TRAP PickRateTrap
Trap routine to calculate the correct pick rate for the robot.
402 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.4.4 Service routines
6.4.4 Service routines
User defined service routines
It is possible to create new routines and variables. All procedure in the
PPASERVICE module can be executed as service routines. All service variable names must be set in a ServiceVarX .
The service variables can only be of type num
.
Maximum number of service variables is ten.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
403
6 RAPID reference
6.5.1 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
6.5 Program examples
6.5.1 Example: Mixing one pick work area and two place work areas
Description of example
In this example we use one pick work area with two types of items. The items are put on two out work areas depending on type of item.
1 Pick item from pick work area
2 Define type of item
3 Place on out work area
Example code
PROC PickPlaceSeq()
Pick PickWorkArea{1};
IF PickTarget.Type = 1 THEN
Place PlaceWorkArea{1};
ELSEIF PickTarget.Type = 2 THEN
Place PlaceWorkArea{2};
ENDIF
ENDPROC
404 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.5.2 Example: Mixing two pick work areas and one place work area
6.5.2 Example: Mixing two pick work areas and one place work area
Description of example
In this example, we use the place work area as master to decide which item is needed to fill a pattern, which in turn defines pick work area to pick from.
1 Check next item target type
2 Decide which work area to pick from
3 Pick item from pick work area
4 Place on out work area
Example code
PROC PickPlaceSeq()
VAR num PlaceType:=0;
NextItmTgtType
ItmSrcData{PlaceWorkArea{1}}.ItemSource,
PlaceType;
IF PlaceType = 1 THEN
Pick PickWorkArea{1};
ELSEIF PlaceType = 2 THEN
Pick PickWorkArea{2};
ENDIF
Place PlaceWorkArea{1};
ENDPROC
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
405
6 RAPID reference
6.5.3 Example: Mixing with one pick and one place work area
6.5.3 Example: Mixing with one pick and one place work area
Description of example
In this example we use the place work area as master to decide which item is needed to fill a pattern, which in turn defines which item to pick.
1 Check next item target type
2 Pick item from pick work area
3 Place on out work area
Note
It's recommended to use the Use Start/Stop in the Available Workareas setting.
Example code
PROC Pick(num Index)
VAR num PickType:=0;
VAR num PlaceType:=0;
WObjPick:=ItmSrcData{Index}.Wobj;
NextItmTgtType
ItmSrcData{PlaceWorkArea{1}}.ItemSource,PlaceType;
TEST PlaceType
CASE 4:
PickType:=1;
CASE 5:
PickType:=2;
CASE 6:
PickType:=3;
ENDTEST
GetItmTgt ItmSrcData{Index}.ItemSource, PickTarget
\ItemType:=PickType;
TriggL \Conc, RelTool(PickTarget.RobTgt, 0, 0,
-ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ), MaxSpeed,
ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumAct1, z20, PickAct1 \WObj:=WObjPick;
MoveL \Conc, PickTarget.RobTgt, LowSpeed, z5 \Inpos:=
ItmSrcData{Index}.TrackPoint, PickAct1 \WObj:=WObjPick;
GripLoad ItemLoad;
TriggL RelTool(PickTarget.RobTgt, 0, 0, -ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ),
LowSpeed, ItmSrcData{Index}.Ack, z20, PickAct1
\WObj:=WObjPick;
ENDPROC
406 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.5.4 Example: Double pick single place
6.5.4 Example: Double pick single place
Description of example
The robot shall pick up two items, one-by-one, on the infeeder conveyor, and then place both items on the outfeed conveyor. This operation requires a picking tool with two vacuum ejectors.
Implementation
As a starting point, create a simple working setup with one robot.
The RAPID program needs to be modified. To edit the RAPID program, go to the
Recipe Setting , select a robot and display the drop down menu, select the Rapid program and select Edit...
.
The PickPlaceSeq routine shall perform two Pick routine calls to handle the first and the second pick. It will then perform one Place routine call to handle the simultaneous placing of the picked up items. See the following example code.
!
! Procedure PickPlaceSeq
!
! The Pick and Place sequence.
! Edit this routine to specify how the robot shall execute the movements.
!
!***********************************************************
PROC PickPlaceSeq()
Pick PickWorkArea{1}, 1;
Pick PickWorkArea{1}, 2;
Place PlaceWorkArea{1};
ENDPROC
For the Pick routine, see the following example code. Note the usage of PickAct2 and
VacuumAct2 for the second pick.
!***********************************************************
!
! Procedure Pick
!
! Executes a pick movement.
! Edit this routine to modify how the robot shall
! execute the pick movements.
! Needs to be changed if more than one activator is used.
!
!***********************************************************
PROC Pick(num Index, num pickNo)
IF Index > 0 THEN
WObjPick:=ItmSrcData{Index}.Wobj;
GetItmTgt ItmSrcData{Index}.ItemSource,PickTarget;
IF pickNo = 1 THEN
TriggL\Conc,RelTool(PickTarget.RobTgt,0,0,
-ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ),
Continues on next page
407 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.5.4 Example: Double pick single place
Continued
MaxSpeed,ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumAct1,z20,
PickAct1\WObj:=WObjPick;
TriggL\Conc,PickTarget.RobTgt,LowSpeed,ItmSrcData{Index}.SimAttach1, z5\Inpos:=ItmSrcData{Index}.TrackPoint,
PickAct1\WObj:=WObjPick;
GripLoad ItemLoad;
TriggL
RelTool(PickTarget.RobTgt,0,0,-ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ),
LowSpeed,ItmSrcData{Index}.Ack,z20,PickAct1\WObj:=WObjPick;
ELSEIF pickNo = 2 THEN
TriggL\Conc,RelTool(PickTarget.RobTgt,0,0,-ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ),
MaxSpeed,ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumAct2, z20,PickAct2\WObj:=WObjPick;
TriggL\Conc,PickTarget.RobTgt,LowSpeed,ItmSrcData{Index}.SimAttach2, z5\Inpos:=ItmSrcData{Index}.TrackPoint,
PickAct2\WObj:=WObjPick;
GripLoad ItemLoad;
TriggL
RelTool(PickTarget.RobTgt,0,0,-ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ),
LowSpeed,ItmSrcData{Index}.Ack,z20,
PickAct2\WObj:=WObjPick;
ENDIF
ELSE
ErrWrite "Missing item distribution", "Cannot pick because no item distribution contains current work area."
\RL2:="Please check configuration";
SafeStop;
ENDIF
ENDPROC
The tooldata PickAct1 is used at the first pick. The tooldata PickAct2 is used at the second pick. Update PickAct1 and PickAct2 (defined in module ppaUser.sys
): Define the tool center point in the center of the controlled vacuum ejector. Update also the weight and the center of mass. Save the updates of the
RAPID program, close the editor, and apply the updates.
For the Place routine see the following example. Note the usage of VacuumOff1 and VacuumOff2 for the simultaneous placing of both held items.
!***********************************************************
!
! Procedure Place
!
! Executes a place movement.
! Edit this routine to modify how the robot shall
! execute the place movements.
! Needs to be changed if more than one activator is used.
!
!***********************************************************
PROC Place(num Index)
IF Index > 0 THEN
WObjPlace:=ItmSrcData{Index}.Wobj;
GetItmTgt ItmSrcData{Index}.ItemSource,PlaceTarget;
Continues on next page
408 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.5.4 Example: Double pick single place
Continued
MoveL\Conc,RelTool(PlaceTarget.RobTgt,0,0,-ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ),
MaxSpeed,z20,PlaceAll\WObj:=WObjPlace;
TriggL\Conc,PlaceTarget.RobTgt,LowSpeed,ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumRev1\T2:=
ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumOff1\T3:=ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumOff2\T4:=
ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumRev2\T5:=ItmSrcData{Index}.SimDetach1\T6:=
ItmSrcData{Index}.SimDetach2,z5\Inpos:=
ItmSrcData{Index}.TrackPoint,PlaceAll\WObj:=WObjPlace;
GripLoad load0;
TriggL RelTool(PlaceTarget.RobTgt,0,0,-ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ),
LowSpeed,ItmSrcData{Index}.Ack,z20,PlaceAll\WObj:=WObjPlace;
ELSE
ErrWrite "Missing item distribution", "Cannot place because no item distribution contains current work area."
\RL2:="Please check configuration";
SafeStop;
ENDIF
ENDPROC
The tooldata PlaceAll (defined in module ppaUser.sys
) is used at place. Update
PlaceAll
: Define the tool center point in the center of the controlled vacuum ejectors. Update also the weight and the center of mass. Save the updates of the
RAPID program, close the editor, and apply the updates.
Note
Use the same method to setup a tool with more than two activators. However, a few additional setup steps are required. For example, using a tool with 3-4 activators requires the following additional steps:
1 Select two I/O boards as controller option. Alternatively, create additional signals goVacBlow3
, goVacBlow4
, doVacuum3
, doVacuum4
, doBlow3
, and doBlow4 . The first bit of goVacBlowX shall overlap the signal doVacuumX
. The second bit of goVacBlowX shall overlap the signal doBlowX .
2 Update the
SetTriggs routine. Enable the
TriggEquip events
VacuumAct3 , VacuumOff3 , VacuumAct4 , and VacuumOff4 by removing the comments on these lines.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
409
6 RAPID reference
6.5.5 Example: Placing a predefined pattern on indexed work area
6.5.5 Example: Placing a predefined pattern on indexed work area
Description of example
In this example we place a predefined pattern on an indexed work area. The position generator signal is triggered from RAPID.
Four new signals must be defined.
1 Position generator signal set from RAPID, doSIMPosGen .
2 Position generator signal that generates an event from the controller to the computer, diSIMPosGen .
3 Trigger signal that tells the system on the computer to send a predefined position, doSIMTrig .
4 Strobe signal that tells the system a position is sent, diSIMStrobe .
The signals can be defined on the PPASIM board. For example:
-Name "doSIMPosGen" -SignalType "DO" -Unit "PPASIM" -UnitMap "6"
-Access "ALL"
-Name "doSIMTrig" -SignalType "DO" -Unit "PPASIM" -UnitMap "7"
-Access "ALL"
-Name "diSIMPosGen" -SignalType "DI" -Unit "PPASIM" -UnitMap "6"
-Access "ALL"
-Name "diSIMStrobe" -SignalType "DI" -Unit "PPASIM" -UnitMap "7"
-Access "ALL"
Cross connect the trigger and strobe signal and the position generator signals.
For example:
EIO_CROSS
-Res "diSIMPosGen" -Act1 "doSIMPosGen"
-Res "diSIMStrobe" -Act1 "doSIMTrig"
In the RAPID code, create a control of the place queue. If the queue is empty (all positions in the pattern are used) set the signal doSIMPosGen high (in the RAPID code). This signal is cross connected with the diSIMPosGen and an event will be sent to the computer from the controller that a new pattern has to be sent to the controller. The trigger strobe signals are also cross connected and the diSIMStrobe will be used to strobe the system.
Example code
PROC Place(num Index)
VAR bool flagplace:=TRUE;
WObjPlace:=ItmSrcData{Index}.Wobj; flagplace:=TRUE;
WHILE flagplace=TRUE DO
GetItmTgt ItmSrcData{Index}.ItemSource,
PlaceTarget\MaxTime:=1\TimeFlag:=flagplace;
IF flagplace=TRUE THEN
PulseDO\PLength:=0.2,doSIMPosGen;
ENDIF
ENDWHILE
Continues on next page
410 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.5.5 Example: Placing a predefined pattern on indexed work area
Continued
MoveL\Conc, RelTool(PlaceTarget.RobTgt, 0, 0,
ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ), MaxSpeed, z20,
PickAct1\WObj:=WObjPlace;
TriggL\Conc, PlaceTarget.RobTgt, LowSpeed,
ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumRev1
\T2:=ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumOff1, z5
\Inpos:=ItmSrcData{Index}.TrackPoint,
PickAct1\WObj:=WObjPlace;
GripLoad load0;
TriggL RelTool(PlaceTarget.RobTgt, 0, 0, ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ),
LowSpeed, ItmSrcData{Index}.Ack, z20,
PickAct1\WObj:=WObjPlace;
ENDPROC
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
411
6 RAPID reference
6.5.6 Example: Selecting item depending on clearance zone
6.5.6 Example: Selecting item depending on clearance zone
Description of example
In this example, we select items on a conveyor belt depending on the clearance zone around the item, that is if there is any other item target within a specified area.
This is useful when it is important that the gripper does not touch surrounding objects.
The selection algorithm selects the object that is closest to the exit limit in x-direction and has no locking objects in the selection shape.
Use the check limit in x-direction as a parameter to the GetItmTgt instruction.
This makes it possible to define the starting point from where the first object will be picked. The instruction will try to retrieve the first object between the check and enter limits. This will cause the selection algorithm to take all objects between the check limit and the exit limit into consideration when checking for the nearest objects. Therefore the distance between the check limit and the exit limit will be at least the diameter of the largest item.
The illustration below shows how the items are selected depending on the position and the orientation. The robot will first pick item 4 and then item 3. The other two will never be picked.
• Item 1 cannot be picked because it has passed the check limit, and item 2 is inside its selection shape.
• Item 2 cannot be picked because the positions of items 1 and 3 are inside its selection shape.
• Item 3 cannot be picked because item 4 is inside its selection area.
• Item 4 can be picked because no other item is its selection shape.
• Item 3 will be picked after item 4 is no longer present.
Continues on next page
412 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.5.6 Example: Selecting item depending on clearance zone
Continued xx0800000323
E
F
C
D
A
B
G
H
Grippers
Selection shape
Item
Item target position
Product flow direction
Exit
Check limit
Enter
See
selectiondata - Selection data on page 387
.
Example code
PROC Pick(num Index)
VAR selectiondata sel_data;
VAR robtarget draw_target;
VAR num check_limit; sel_data.ShapeType:=BOX; sel_data.ConsiderType:=BitOr(ITEMS_TO_USE,ITEMS_BYPASS); sel_data.GeometricData.x:=60; sel_data.GeometricData.y:=70; sel_data.GeometricData.z:=10;sel_data.GeometricData.radius:=0; sel_data.Offset.OffsetRelation:=ITEM_COORD_DIR; sel_data.Offset.OffsetPose.trans.x:=0; sel_data.Offset.OffsetPose.trans.y:=0; sel_data.Offset.OffsetPose.trans.z:=0; sel_data.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q1:=1; sel_data.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q2:=0;
Continues on next page
413 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.5.6 Example: Selecting item depending on clearance zone
Continued sel_data.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q3:=0; sel_data.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q4:=0; check_limit:=150;
WObjPick:=ItmSrcData{Index}.Wobj;
GetItmTgt ItmSrcData{Index}.ItemSource,PickTarget
\Limit:=check_limit\Selection:=sel_data;
TriggL \Conc, RelTool(PickTarget.RobTgt, 0, 0,
-ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ), MaxSpeed,
ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumAct1, z20, PickAct1\WObj:=WObjPick;
MoveL \Conc, PickTarget.RobTgt, LowSpeed, z5 \Inpos:=
ItmSrcData{Index}.TrackPoint, PickAct1\WObj:=WObjPick;
GripLoad ItemLoad;
TriggL RelTool(PickTarget.RobTgt, 0, 0, -ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ),
LowSpeed, ItmSrcData{Index}.Ack, z20,
PickAct1\WObj:=WObjPick;
ENDPROC
414 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.5.7 Example: Sorting in negative y-direction
6.5.7 Example: Sorting in negative y-direction
Description of example
In this example, we shuffle items off a conveyor belt without touching surrounding objects. The shuffle movement is done perpendicular on the horizontal plane to the right side of the conveyor and the manipulator motion is coordinated with the conveyor motion.
The sorting algorithm selects the item closest to the exit limit in x-direction and has no locking objects in its selection shape.
The selection shape is defined as a long box. The shape’s x-value is used to define the corridor width, the y-value must be more than half the width of the conveyor belt and the z-value must be greater than the largest difference in height among all items.
Set the y-value in the
OffsetData to the negative y-value of the shape, the selection box will be moved out to the right.
As a result there must be a clear corridor to the right of every item before it is shuffled.
The algorithm will check both upwards and downwards the production flow for other items.
Use the check limit in the x-direction as a parameter to the GetItmTgt instruction, to define the starting point from where the first item will be shuffled. The instruction will try to shuffle the first item between the check and enter limits. This will also cause the selection algorithm to take all items between the check limit and the exit limit into consideration when checking for the nearest items. Therefore the distance between the check limit and the exit limit will be at least the diameter of the largest item.
In the illustration below, all items will be shuffled off to the right side of the conveyor belt. Because each item needs a clear zone, that is the shape of the ShapeType ,
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
415
6 RAPID reference
6.5.7 Example: Sorting in negative y-direction
Continued the items will be shuffled off in the order 1 to 10 as numbered in the illustration below.
xx0800000324
A
B
C
D
E
Exit
Check limit
Product flow direction
Sort direction
Enter
Example code
Continues on next page
416
PROC Pick(num Index)
VAR selectiondata y_sort;
VAR robtarget draw_target;
VAR num check_limit; y_sort.ShapeType:=BOX; y_sort.ConsiderType:=BitOr(ITEMS_TO_USE,ITEMS_BYPASS); y_sort.GeometricData.x:=41; y_sort.GeometricData.y:=160; y_sort.GeometricData.z:=5; y_sort.GeometricData.radius:=0; y_sort.Offset.OffsetRelation:=FRAME_COORD_DIR;
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.5.7 Example: Sorting in negative y-direction
Continued y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.trans.x:=0; y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.trans.y:=-150; y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.trans.z:=0; y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q1:=1; y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q2:=0; y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q3:=0; y_sort.Offset.OffsetPose.rot.q4:=0; check_limit:=150;
WObjPick:=ItmSrcData{Index}.Wobj;
GetItmTgt ItmSrcData{Index}.ItemSource,PickTarget
\Limit:=check_limit\Selection:= y_sort;
TriggL\Conc, RelTool(PickTarget.RobTgt, 0, 0,
-ItmSrcData{Index}.OffsZ), MaxSpeed,
ItmSrcData{Index}.VacuumAct1, z20, Gripper\WObj:=WObjPick;
MoveL\Conc, PickTarget.RobTgt, LowSpeed, z5
\Inpos:=ItmSrcData{Index}.TrackPoint, Gripper
\WObj:=WObjPick;
GripLoad ItemLoad; draw_target:=PickTarget.RobTgt; draw_target.trans.y:=-200; draw_target.rot:=[0,1,0,0];
TriggL draw_target, LowSpeed, ItmSrcData{Index}.Ack, z20,
Gripper\WObj:=WObjPick;
ENDPROC
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
417
6 RAPID reference
6.5.8 Example: Indexed work area with predefined position
6.5.8 Example: Indexed work area with predefined position
Description of example
In this example we use an indexed work area with predefined positions.
When using predefined positions with the indexed work area, we must modify the configuration, that is the EIO.cfg file. We will cross connect the trigger and strobe signals because with predefined positions there is no system generating the strobe signal. Without the predefined positions, the trigger signal is sent to the vision system to acquire an image. The strobe is then sent back from the vision system to acknowledge that the image has been acquired.
This is an example setup for a line that is triggered externally by an I/O signal and the position source is a predefined positions type. We recommend defining unique signal names for all new signals when setting up a system that is much different from the standard system.
Two new signals are used in this line:
• The trigger signal, doTrigSignal .
• The strobe signal, diStrobeSignal
.
Modify the signal configurations by adding the two signals.
EIO_SIGNAL:
-Name "doTrigSignal" -SignalType "DO" -Unit "PPASIM" -UnitMap "6"
-Access "ALL"
-Name "diStrobeSignal" - SignalType "DI" -Unit "PPASIM" -UnitMap
"6" -Access "ALL"
The trigger and strobe signals are cross connected since there is no vision system that can send back a strobe signal.
EIO_CROSS
-Res "diStrobeSignal" -Act1 "doTrigSignal"
The Position generator signal in this case is di1_1
, which is connection 1 on the
DSQC 328A:X3 board, see Circuit diagram - PickMaster Twin , 3HAC024480-020 .
When the di1_1 goes high (by an external I/O signal) the trigger signal is pulsed.
Since the trigger and strobe signals are cross connected, the strobe will be received immediately. An event will then be sent from the controller to the computer, which it is ready for new item positions and the predefined positions will then be sent to the controller. If a pattern is used, several positions are sent for every signal.
In this example the robot execution signal is not used and was therefore removed.
418 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 RAPID reference
6.5.9 Example: Automatically generating new positions to indexed work area
6.5.9 Example: Automatically generating new positions to indexed work area
Description of example
In this example we configure an indexed work area and the queue will automatically be refilled with new positions when it is empty.
The trigger and strobe signals are set up as in
Example: Indexed work area with predefined position on page 418
.
Instead of using an external input I/O signal, we will use a new simulated input I/O signal as position generator signal. This signal is set by a cross connected simulated output signal.
Two new signals are used in this line:
• The output position generator signal, doPosGenSignal .
• The input position generator signal, diPosGenSignal .
Modify the signal configurations by adding the two signals.
EIO_SIGNAL:
-Name "doPosGenSignal" - SignalType "DO" -Unit "PPASIM" - UnitMap
"7" -Access "ALL"
-Name "diPosGenSignal" - SignalType "DI" -Unit "PPASIM" - UnitMap
"7" -Access "ALL"
The position generator signals are cross connected.
EIO_CROSS
-Res "diPosGenSignal" -Act1 "doPosGenSignal" diPosGenSignal is defined in the line as the position generator signal and doPosGenSignal is defined as queue idle signal.
When the queue goes empty the queue idle signal doPosGenSignal will go high.
This cross connection will make diPosGenSignal go high and new positions will be pushed to the queue according to the earlier described principles.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
419
This page is intentionally left blank
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Introduction to troubleshooting
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Introduction to troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes some of the most common troubles known when installing, configuring, or running PickMaster PowerPac.
A fault in the robot system first appears as a symptom, which can be:
• An event log message that can be viewed using PickMaster PowerPac,
FlexPendant, RobotStudio, or Windows Event Viewer.
• The system is performing poorly or displaying mechanical disturbances.
• The system can not be started or displays irrational behavior during start.
• Indications on the hardware, such as LEDs.
• Other types of symptoms. The robot system is complex and has a large number of functions and function combinations.
Related information
Generic troubleshooting and all error messages in the robot system are listed in
Operating manual - Troubleshooting IRC5 .
Administering the log on page 423
.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
421
7 Troubleshooting
7.2 Safety during troubleshooting
7.2 Safety during troubleshooting
General
All normal service work; installation, maintenance and repair work, is usually performed with all electrical, pneumatic and hydraulic power switched off. All manipulator movements are usually prevented by mechanical stops etc.
Troubleshooting work differs from this. While troubleshooting, all or any power may be switched on, the manipulator movement may be controlled manually from the FlexPendant, by a locally running robot program or by a PLC to which the system may be connected.
Dangers during troubleshooting
This implies that special considerations unconditionally must be taken when troubleshooting:
• All electrical parts must be considered as live .
• The manipulator must at all times be expected to perform any movement.
• Since safety circuits may be disconnected or strapped to enable normally prohibited functions, the system must be expected to perform accordingly.
DANGER
Troubleshooting on the controller while powered on must be performed by personnel trained by ABB or by ABB field engineers.
422 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.3 Administering the log
7.3 Administering the log
The log
The log messages that are displayed in the log area of PickMaster PowerPac.
Administering the log
Use this procedure to administer the event log.
1 Click the LOG ribbon
2 If you need to view the event log in the PickMaster PowerPac, select Viewer .
The event log will show up.
3 If you need to view the event log without the PickMaster PowerPac, select
Save . The event log will be saved as xlsx file.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
423
7 Troubleshooting
7.4.1 Warnings 4326 - 4329
7.4 Fault symptoms or errors
7.4.1 Warnings 4326 - 4329
Verification actions
The following are the general verification actions for the warning 4326, 4327, 4328, and 4329. For more detailed explanation, see
,
Warning 4328 and 4329 received together on page 426 ,
4328 received without 4329 on page 427
, and
Warning 4329 received without 4328 on page 427 .
Action 1
Check the selection of signals for trigger and strobe in the work area configuration of the PickMaster line. Check that the I/O configurations of these signals correspond to the wiring.
Action 2
Check all the trig/strobe wiring. Check if the trig and strobe cables are mixed up.
Make sure that the cables are shielded, properly attached and grounded the right way. There should be no current in the shield. Make sure that sources for 24 volt are not mixed. The controller system parameter SyncSeparation (Topic: I/O, Type:
Fieldbus Command, Name: CNVX) can be modified to filter strobe input events from a camera or sensor.
Action 3
Check all the LAN cables on the robot network. Make sure that the cables are shielded and properly attached. Check that the right IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask is defined (on both PC and robot controller). Note that all three values must be defined even if there is only one computer and one robot controller on the network. For more information, see
Configuring networks on page 39
.
Action 4
See
Configuring networks on page 39 ..
Action 5
Check that the IP address (goto File and click Options ) in the field "Controller
Network Adapter" is the address of the network interface card in the PC that communicates with the robot controller. Check if time sync service has trouble to connect to controller. Stop the service for 30 seconds and then restart it again.
Check that there are no firewalls active that are affecting the time synchronization services.
Action 6
Reduce the trigger frequency Sometimes the trigger distance is very short causing the system to trigger much more often than it can handle. How often a trigger can be handled depends on how complicated the models are that are used on the system. Sometimes the frequent triggering can be caused by faulty trigger/strobe wiring or electrical noise.
Continues on next page
424 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.4.1 Warnings 4326 - 4329
Continued
Action 7
Some switches are buffering data that needs to be present. This buffering time might be too long. Try to switch to a simple hub or to decrease this buffer time.
Make sure that you have the newest software running on the hub/switch. Make sure that there are no infinite loops in the RAPID code because it will affect the robot network communication .
Action 8
Debug the implementation of the external sensor.
Action 9
For external sensors there might be a small constant delay between the strobe pulses and the recording of time stamps (For example, if the trigger signal is cross connected with the strobe). Modify the Position Source parameter Synchronization tune to modify all time stamps sent to PickMaster with a constant time value.
Warning 4326
For verification actions, see the preceding section.
Error description:
4326 Item positions lost on %s due to missing strobe. See Application manual.
Probable causes:
The following table provides the probable causes of the warning 4326:
Probable cause
If work area is conveyor:
The conveyor board does not receive any strobe pulses on the start input.
The strobe signal is not configured as cXNewObjStrobe.
PickMaster has no connection with the robot controller.
If work area is indexed:
The configured strobe signal does not receive a strobe pulses.
PickMaster has no connection with the robot controller.
Verfication actions
Warning 4327
Error description:
4327 Expected item positions missing from %s. See Application manual.
Probable causes:
The following table provides the probable causes of the warning 4327:
Probable cause
If source type is camera:
The camera does not receive trigger pulses.
Verfication actions
PickMaster has no connection with the camera.
Continues on next page
425 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.4.1 Warnings 4326 - 4329
Continued
Probable cause
If source type is external sensor:
The external sensor does not receive any trigger pulses.
Verfication actions
The external sensor does not send any positions to PickMaster.
If source type is external sensor:
The external sensor does not receive any trigger pulses.
The external sensor does not send any positions to PickMaster.
If source type is predefined and work area is conveyor:
The conveyor board does not receive any strobe pulses on the start input.
The strobe signal is not configured as cXNewObjStrobe.
PickMaster has no connection with the robot controller
If source type is predefined and work area is indexed:
The configured strobe signal does not receive an strobe pulses.
PickMaster has no connection with the robot controller.
Warning 4328 and 4329 received together
Error description:
Typically, a pair of 4328 and 4329 is received for one, several or every trigger/strobe related to a work area.
4328 Trigger/strobe time mismatch (%.1f s). Item positions from %s to %s lost.
See Application manual.
4329 Trigger/strobe time mismatch (%.1f s). Strobe from %s was ignored. See
Application manual.
Probable causes:
The following table provides the probable causes of the warning 4328 and 4329:
Probable cause
In order of probability:
The time synchronisation between controllers and PickMaster is not working.
The trigger frequency is set too high.
Low robot network performance
Low camera network performance
Additional causes for external sensors:
Time stamps are not enough synchronized with strobes.
The external sensor does not send positions with a correct time stamp..
Verfication actions
Continues on next page
426 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.4.1 Warnings 4326 - 4329
Continued
Warning 4328 received without 4329
Error description:
4328 Trigger/strobe time mismatch (%.1f s). Item positions from %s to %s lost.
See Application manual.
Probable causes:
The following table provides the probable causes of the warning 4328 and 4329:
Probable cause
The trigger signal is not stable.
Verfication actions
Warning 4329 received without 4328
Error description:
4329 Trigger/strobe time mismatch (%.1f s). Strobe from %s was ignored. See
Application manual.
Probable causes:
The following table provides the probable causes of the warning 4328 and 4329:
Probable cause
The strobe signal is not stable.
Verfication actions
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
427
7 Troubleshooting
7.4.2 The camera does not take pictures
7.4.2 The camera does not take pictures
Error description
The camera does not take pictures.
Probable causes
There can be several causes why the camera does not take pictures. To check all the possible causes the following must be verified.
• Check that the trig cable is properly connected.
• Check that the camera cable is connected to the correct port.
If the camera is distance trigged, the encoder might not be recording any conveyor movement due to
• bad encoder connection or
• wrong conveyor selected in the work area.
If the camera is I/O trigged, the photo eye might not be sensing any part, due to:
• Wrong connection.
• Bad reflection.
428 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.4.3 Robot does not move
7.4.3 Robot does not move
Error description
The camera is identifying objects, but the robot does not move.
Probable causes
There can be several causes why the robot does not move although the camera takes pictures properly. To check all the possible causes the following must be verified.
• To check that the strobe cable is connected, check the StartSig LED on the encoder board.
• Check the distribution in the Position Source.
• Check the AI c*Speed in the I/O list if any speed is detected. If not, check encoder signals.
• Check the AI c*Position in the I/O list if any position is tracked. If not, check the distribution in the Position Source.
• Check the direction of travel on the DI c*DirOfTravel .
• Monitor the signal Queue Idle , to see if the queue gets any positions.
• Monitor the Position Available signal, to see if the parts are detected.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
429
7 Troubleshooting
7.4.4 Bad or varying position accuracy
7.4.4 Bad or varying position accuracy
Error description
The position accuracy is bad or varying.
Probable causes
There can be several causes why the position accuracy is bad or varying. To check all the possible causes the following must be verified.
• Verify that the Counts Per Meter calibration is accurate. Verify several times.
Include verification in scheduled maintenance.
• Avoid drive shaft encoders, since belt slippage between roller and belt can vary.
• Check the camera calibration. Poor quality of calibration grid will give inaccurate calibration result.
• Check if there are differences between calibration paper height and product height.
• Check if there are parallax errors when identifying high products.
• Make sure that the camera is not mounted on robot frame because this can cause camera vibrations.
430 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.4.5 Positions are used twice
7.4.5 Positions are used twice
Error description
The robot uses every position twice.
Probable causes
There can be several causes why the robot uses every position twice. To check all the possible causes the following must be verified.
• If I/O trigged predefined positions or containers are used, set the
SyncSeparation filter distance to avoid double and ghost triggers.
• If vision is used, increase the overlap and position filter.
• Clear the checkbox Same level only in the Position Source.
If a robot downstream in an ATC group tries to use an already used item, then the
Work Area order in the Position Source is incorrect.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
431
7 Troubleshooting
7.4.6 Problem with camera resolution in PickMaster
7.4.6 Problem with camera resolution in PickMaster
Error description
Camera image size decreases to lower resolution as compared to calibration image resolution.
Probable causes
There can be several causes why camera resolution is decreased. To check all the possible causes the following must be verified:
• Is the factory default configuration is active.
• There could be custom configuration activated. Verify if the custom configuration is having reduced ROI (region of interest).
432 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
7.5 Error codes
Common error codes
Error code
4097
4098
4099
4100
4101
4197
4198
4199
4200
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
Type
Error
Status
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Warning
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Description
Undefined error
Reason: The occurred error has not been given a correct error
ID but the error message should explain the reason.
Information only
Command line options
Reason: PickMaster was given an unknown command line option, e.g. /p, at startup.
Description: Unexpected error
Reason: An unexpected error occurred in PickMaster. See the log message for more information.
XML parsing error
Reason: There was a problem reading either a pmline or pmproj file. See the log message for further information about where in the file the error occurred.
The project has been upgraded to a later version and the file is marked as modified. The file needs to be saved to make changes permanent.
The line has been upgraded to a later version. If the line itself was opened it is marked as modified and needs to be saved.
If a project was opened, the line should be opened and saved before continuing.
The project file has an invalid format. It was either created with a beta version of PickMaster or the file is corrupt.
The PickMaster program failed to access the Windows registry when writing or reading its configuration
The project is not designed on the current line. When trying to open a project, there is already a project open that is built upon a different line.
Reason: Only one line can be used at the same time.
Solution: Close any open projects and try to open the project again.
Failed to load the corresponding line when opening a project.
The line file may be corrupt
Failed to load a line. The file may be corrupt.
The imported line may need to be recalibrated
Reason: If the imported line was designed with other cameras or lenses, the cameras as well as the robot’s base frame must be recalibrated.
The selected RIS plug-in could not be loaded at program startup. The file may be corrupt.
The selected RIS plug-in could not be found at program startup.
One of the previously available lines has been overwritten by another line. The old line will not show up as an available line and projects designed on that line cannot be used.
Continues on next page
433 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
Continued
Error code
4209
4210
4211
4212
4213
4216
4217
4218
4297
4298
4300
4301
4302
4303
4304
4305
Type
Error
Error
Status
Error
Warning
Error
Error
Warning
Status
Status
Error
Error
Error
Error
Warning
Error
Description
The line file is invalid and cannot be opened.
Failed to load resources for the selected language. The default language (English) will be used instead
A notification about the total number of picks done by a robot until the project was stopped.
Failed to remove the line file. The file must be removed manually.
Failed to find the html help file for the selected language.
Make sure the "Application manual xxx.chm" file is in the
Documentation folder in the PickMaster folder.
An attempt to open a file not recognized by PickMaster.
No time synchronization service available.
Reason: The PickMaster Time Synchronization Service might not be properly installed or not started.
Solution: Verify the service is installed and try to restart the service.
Two or more network adapters are configured on the same subnet: x.x.x
Refer to the user guide and review the recommended network settings.
Attempt to start a project that is already running.
Attempt to stop a project that was not started.
A camera is currently in use by another project.
Reason: When starting a project, one of the position sources is configured with a camera that is currently in use by another project.
Solution: A camera can only be used in production in one project at the same time. Reconfigure one project or run them one at a time.
Failed to start project execution
Reason: Internal error probably caused by out of memory.
Solution: Try restarting the PickMaster program.
When starting a project, a vision defined position source has no camera defined.
Solution: Either remove the position source or configure it with the camera to use.
When starting a project, a position source has no work area defined
Solution: Either remove the position source or configure it with the work area to use
When starting a project, a vision defined position source has no configured vision models.
Solution: Either remove the position source or define which vision models to use.
When starting a project, a predefined position source has no object defined.
Solution: Edit the position source and define the predefined object to use.
Continues on next page
434 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
Continued
Error code
4306
4307
4308
4309
4310
4311
4312
4313
4314
4315
4319
4320
4321
4326
4327
4328
4329
4396
Type
Status
Warning
Error
Warning
Status
Status
Warning
Error
Error
Status
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Error
Description
A model was edited on a different camera than it was created on.
Solution: Check that the correct camera is selected in the position source and retrain the model.
A vision model was created on a camera that has not been calibrated.
Solution: Open the corresponding line and calibrate the camera. Then retrain the model.
When running a project, a vision model found an object but could not find the item or container to refer to.
Solution: Stop the project, remove the vision model in question and create a new one for the correct item.
A container is incorrectly configured.
Solution: Check the error message for more information.
Production was successfully started.
Production was successfully stopped.
Indication that PickMaster is running on a demo license with limited production time.
Reason: There is only a demo license installed
Solution: Request a fully qualified license to run projects for an unlimited time.
PickMaster is running on a demo license and the allowed production time is exceeded.
Solution: Request a fully qualified license or restart the Pick-
Master program to be able to start a project again
Got scene information from an unknown work area.
The work area that triggers a Position Source has changed.
This occurs at project startup or when the robot controller with the previous trigger work area has stopped.
Received item acknowledgment from an unknown work area.
A project that used load balancing has been upgraded and a work area order was generated. The work area order must be verified in the Position Source configuration dialog box
An item acknowledge was received from a work area but the corresponding item position could not be found. Following work areas will not be notified that an item position has already been accessed.
Item positions lost on work area due to missing strobe. For more information, see
Warnings 4326 - 4329 on page 424
.
Expected item positions missing from position source. For more information, see
Warnings 4326 - 4329 on page 424
.
Trigger/strobe time mismatch. Item positions from position souce to work area lost. For more information, see
.
Trigger/strobe time mismatch. Strobe from work area was ignored. For more information, see
Warnings 4326 - 4329 on page 424
.
A COM error occurred in when using an External Sensor. The log message provides more information.
Continues on next page
435 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
Continued
Error code
4397
4398
4399
4596
4797
4798
4799
4800
4804
4805
4806
4807
4808
4809
4810
4811
4812
4813
Continues on next page
436
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Type
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Warning
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Description
An error occurred when calling a function on an External
Sensor COM object. The log message provides more information.
When opening a project with en external position generator, its corresponding sensor could not be found in the used line.
An external sensor failed to start when the project was started.
The position source will not be used during production.
General User Hook error. See description for more information.
General license error. See description for more information.
More cameras are used than allowed by the currently installed license.
Solution: Either remove cameras or request a new license.
More robot controllers are used than allowed by the currently installed license.
Solution: Either remove robot controllers or request a new license.
More cameras are using inspection vision models than allowed by the currently installed license.
Solution: Either remove inspection models or request a new license.
More robot controllers are using camera distribution than allowed by the currently installed license
Solution: Either make sure not to use more camera distribution than allowed or request a new license.
Attempt to start a project with ATC without an appropriate license.
Solution: Request a new license including the ATC option or remove ATC from the project.
The licence will expire in less than 14 days.
Solution: Request a new license.
More External Sensors are used than allowed by the currently installed license.
Solution: Either remove External Sensors or request a new license.
Attempt to start a project with conveyors without an appropriate license.
Solution: Request a new license including the ATC option or remove all conveyors from the project.
The network adapter (IP-address) not found.
Solution: Make sure that the specified network card is enabled and that the IP address of the card has not changed.
Access to Service denied.
Reason: PickMaster cannot Access Windows Services.
Cannot access PickMaster Time Synchronization Service.
Reason: PickMaster Time Synchronization Service is not installed.
Cannot stop PickMaster Time Synchronization Service.
Cannot start PickMaster Time Synchronization Service.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
Continued
Robot error codes
Error code
8193
8194
8195
8196
8197
8198
8199
8200
8201
8202
8203
8204
8205
8209
8211
8212
8213
Type
Status
Status
Status
Warning
Warning
Status
Error
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Status
Status
Status
Error
Warning
Warning
Description
The robot is running.
The robot is stopped.
The robot is paused
Please set the robot in auto mode.
Reason: The robot is started but the controller is not set to auto mode.
Solution: Switch the controller to auto mode.
Please confirm auto mode (on the FlexPendant).
Reason: The robot is started and is set to auto mode but the auto mode is not confirmed.
Solution: Confirm the auto mode on the FlexPendant.
The robot is in auto mode.
Robot error X (where X is the robot error number).
Solution: See the robot documentation for the specific error.
Robot warning X (where X is the robot warning number).
Solution: See the robot documentation for the specific warning.
Robot program controller in unknown state.
Reason: The robot was started but the program controller is in an unknown state.
Guard stop
Reason: The robot has been stopped because a guard has been activated.
Emergency stop
Reason: The robot has been stopped because of an activation of the emergency stop
Solution: Remove the reason for the stop and reset the emergency stop. Restart the robot (can be done without stopping the project).
Rapid program stopped
Rapid program has been restarted
Robot controller is in system failure
Reason: See event log on the controller for more information
Lost connection
Reason: The computer lost the connection to the controller.
The network connection can be down. The controller can be shut off or lost its power.
Solution: Make sure that the controller is on and has power supply. Also make sure that the network connection is working.
A robot controller is used by another project
Reason: A robot controller may only be used by one project at a time
Robot controller not in use and may not be accessed.
Reason: An attempt was made to access a robot controller that was not configured to be used in the project.
Continues on next page
437 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
Continued
8303
8304
8305
8306
Error code
8293
8294
8295
8297
8298
8299
8300
8302
8307
8308
8309
8310
Type
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Description
Failed to set motors on.
Reason: PickMaster failed to set motors on. Some system state prevents PickMaster from setting the motors to on (e.g.
emergency stop, guard stop etc.).
Failed to start the RAPID program.
Failed to prepare the RAPID program for start.
Failed to set the RAPID variable “RoutineName” to “ClearAll”
Reason: The variable “RoutineName” is probably missing or is of the wrong type (should be a string type)..
Solution: Ensure that the variable exists and is of the string type.
Failed to get the robot controller states.
Solution: Ensure that the controller is up and running OK. If not, reboot the controller.
Failed to get events from the robot controller.
Solution: Ensure that the controller is up and running OK. If not, reboot the controller. Ensure that the correct network adapter is used for the specific controller in the line.
Error
Error
Failed to set the RAPID variable “StopProcess” to TRUE.
Solution: Ensure that the RAPID variable“ StopProcess” exists and is of type bool.
Failed to set the RAPID variable “RoutineName” to “Pick-
Place”.
Reason: The variable “RoutineName” is probably missing or is of the wrong type (should be a string type).
Solution: Ensure that the variable exists and is of the string type.
Internal Error
Internal Error
The system failed to apply a new work area tune because the work area ID does not exist.
The system failed to apply new work area settings because the work area ID does not exist.
Internal Error
Error
The system failed to apply a new work area setting.
Failed to set DO signal “doSafeStop".
Solution: Verify that the signal exists and is correctly set-up.
Error
Error
Error
Error
Failed to connect to the controller.
Solution: Verify that the network address (IP address) to the controller is correct. Verify that the network settings on the computer are correct. Verify that the correct network adapter is used (in the line) to connect to the robot controller.
Failed to write the IP address to the controller.
Solution: Verify that the RAPID variable“ RemoteIPNode” exists and is of the correct type (should be of the string type).
Failed to initiate events from the robot controller.
Solution: Verify that the robot controller is up and running correctly. If not, reboot the controller.
Failed to get the robot controller states.
Solution: Ensure that the controller is up and running OK. If not, reboot the controller.
Continues on next page
438 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
8318
8319
8320
8321
8322
8323
8324
Error code
8313
Type
Error
8314 Error
8315
8316
8317
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
Continued
Description
Failed to set the IO signal ppaExe.
Solution: Ensure that the signal ppaExe exists and is set-up correctly.
Failed to set the RAPID variable “RoutineName” to “NewSource”.
Reason: The variable “RoutineName” is probably missing or is of the wrong type (should be a string type).
Solution: Ensure that the variable exists and is of the string type.
The system failed to apply the new robot speed.
Failed to set the IO signal doTune.
Solution: Ensure that the signal doTune exists and is set-up correctly.
The system failed to apply a new work area tune.
Solution: Verify that the following RAPID variables exist.
Num SourceIndex
Num TunePosX
Num TunePosY
Num TunePosZ
Failed to load the RAPID program.
Solution: Verify that there are no errors in the RAPID program
(otherwise it will fail to load).
Failed to download the RAPID program to the controller.
Failed to stop execution of the RAPID program.
Failed to delete the RAPID program.
Failed to reset emergency stop.
Failed to restart the RAPID program.
Solution: Stop the project and restart it.
Failed to get local IP address.
Reason: The network set-up is not correct (e.g. wrong IP settings, faulty network adapter configuration, etc.).
Solution: Solve the local network problem on the computer.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
439
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
Continued
Error code
8325
Type
Error
8326
8327
8337
8338
8339
8340
8341
Continues on next page
440
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Description
Failed to init queues.
Reason: PickMaster failed to initiate an item queue. The queue is initiated by setting several RAPID variables. Those variables must not be removed or changed. The variables are:
String ItmSrcName
String CnvName
String NonCnvWobjName
Num SourceType
Num SourceIndex
Num TunePosX
Num TunePosY
Num TunePosZ
Num FollowTime
Num Vtcp
Num OffsZ
Num VacActDelay
Num VacRevDelay
Solution: Ensure that all variables exist and are of the correct type (string or num etc.) in the RAPID program or in the PPA sys module ( ppasys.sys
).
Failed to synchronize the time on the robot controller with the PickMaster compute
There is no Rapid program defined for a robot controller when starting a project.
Reason: Attempt to start a project without having configured which Rapid program to use for a robot controller.
Solution: Select a Rapid program to use for the robot controller in question and restart the project.
Failed to flush item source queue (ItmSrcCnvxx). C0040403:
No response from the controller.
Reason: For large robots where working range is large, CPU takes more time for indexing it because of
GetReachableTarget functionality.
Solution: The accuracy of the release zone (indexed working range) associated with the function UseReachableTargets can be adjusted from 0% to 100% with a new process system parameter, Reach Zone Accuracy , in Type Conveyor .
Default value is 100%. To make CPU load less make this value zero or very low. If the UseReachableTargets functionality is not used, it may be turned off by setting the Reach
Zone Accuracy value to 0.
Not connected to controller.
Reason: The communication with the controller could not be completed.
Unexpected error when using ABB Industrial Robot Communication Runtime to communicate with controller.
Reason: See error log for more information.
Unexpected robot error.
Reason: See error log for more information.
Failed to get write access to controller.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
Continued
8393
8394
8395
8396
8404
8406
8407
8408
8399
8400
8401
8402
8403
Error code
8342
8343
8345
8397
8398
8418
Error
Error
Error
Error
Type
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Warning
Status
Description
Item source failed to send positions to the controller. No response from the controller.
The RobotWare version is later than the ABB Industrial Robot
Communication Runtime on the PC. The Communication
Runtime needs to be updated.
Solution: If possible update PickMaster to the latest version.
If this dose not solve the problem or for some reason is not possible, update the ABB Industrial Robot Communication
Runtime on the PC.
The installation can be downloaded from the RobotStudio
Online Community , where it is included in the Tools and
Utilities package.
Failed to start program in Auto.
Possible reason: The RW role setting 'Remote start/stop program in Auto' is not selected.
The motion server already exists as an instance (only one instance is allowed).
The robot ID already exists (IDs shall be unique).
No robot defined with that ID.
Work areas still exist. The conveyor cannot be removed before the work areas are removed.
Solution: Remove all work areas for the conveyor.
A work area with that ID already exists. (All IDs shall be unique).
No work area with that ID exists. An operation was executed on a non-existing work area. The work area has probably been removed.
Settings on the work area failed due to a bad work area ID.
The system failed to apply new work area settings due to a bad work area ID.
The system failed to set a new work area because the work area ID does not exist.
The system failed to apply a new work area tune because the work area ID does not exist.
The system failed to apply new robot settings because the robot ID does not exist.
The system failed to set new robot settings because the robot
ID does not exist.
The system failed to set a new robot speed because the robot
ID does not exist.
Failed to update the work area due to wrong work area type
(indexed work area / conveyor work area).
There are no work areas defined for the robot.
Solution: Define work areas and set up position sources for the work areas for the robot before project start
Downloading elog files from controller.
Reason: If elog files are missing at production start they will be downloaded automatically.
Continues on next page
441 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
Continued
Vision error codes
Error code
12298
12299
12300
12301
12302
12305
12306
12307
12308
12309
12310
12312
12313
12315
12316
12317
12318
Type
Status
Description
There is no frame grabber/Gigabit Ethernet camera installed
Internal Error
Could not find the camera in question in the vision server.
Internal Error
Internal Error
Could not find the vision model in question in the vision server.
The camera is locked.
Internal Error
Error
Attempt to create or load a camera that already exists.
Internal Error
The current frame grabber does not support the selected video format.
Failed to create camera.
Internal Error
Warning
Error
The vision server could not find the acquired camera during runtime.
A camera is triggered too fast.
Reason: A camera was triggered before it was done analyzing the last image. As long as there only are a few messages there will be no lost images.
Solution: Adjust the vision models on the camera to yield a faster analyzing time. Adjust models on other cameras since it is the system performance in total that should be improved.
Lowering the conveyor speed will also reduce the problem, if applicable.
Failed to get an image from a camera when running a project.
Reason: This error probably occurred because the system is too heavily loaded or the frame grabber is triggered way too fast.
Solution: Verify system load and make sure the robot controller does not send faulty vision triggers.
Internal Error
Failed to create a geometric model.
Reason: See error message for more information.
Internal Error
Internal Error
Attempt to access a camera port on a frame grabber that does not exist.
There is no camera port on the frame grabber specified for the camera.
Solution: Open the corresponding line and configure the camera with a camera port.
Error
Error
Error
Error
Could not initiate the camera at project start.
Reason: The system is probably out of resources.
External model failed to analyze image.
Reason: See log message for more information
Failed to initiate external model at project start.
Reason: See log message for more information
Failed to convert image to a format supported by external vision model.
Continues on next page
442 Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Troubleshooting
7.5 Error codes
Continued
12323
12324
12325
12326
12329
Error code
12319
12321
12322
12330
12331
12332
12333
12334
12337
12341
12342
Error
Error
Error
Error
Warning
Type
Error
Error
Error
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Status
Warning
Description
External model failed to inspect image.
Reason: See log message for more information
When the line was opened, more than one camera was defined to use the same port on the same frame grabber.
Only one camera can be configured to use a single camera port and hence the other cameras were reset and must be configured again.
When the line was opened, a camera was defined on a frame grabber that was not available. The camera was reset and must be configured again.
Could not initiate the camera. More information is provided in the log message.
Failed to save camera configuration. More information is provided in the log message
Failed to load camera configuration. More information is provided in the log message.
Failed to load vision model configuration. More information is provided in the log message
Failed to communicate with Gigabit Ethernet camera.
Reason: Bad Ethernet connection or excessive Ethernet communication.
Images are triggered too frequently.
Solution: Adjust vision models to be less time consuming, or decrease trigger frequency.
Connection to camera is lost, attempting to reconnect.
Reason: Ethernet cable or power cable has been disconnected.
Image Buffer Full. More information is provided in the log message.
A Gigabit Ethernet camera was found, but no such license was detected.
Reason: No USB stick with vision license is inserted in the
PC.
A license for Gigabit Ethernet vision was detected, but no such camera was found.
Reason: Camera is not connected, not turned on, or has an invalid IP-address.
Failed to read parameter from camera.
Reason: Check if the appropriate Cognex Drivers are installed.
If the problem persits, check network connections.
Cognex USB License dongle is attached.
Cognex USB License dongle is removed.
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
443
This page is intentionally left blank
8 Spare parts
8 Spare parts
Camera parts
Spare part list
-
Spare part number Description
3HAC072146-001 Cognex camera kit
Type
For more details on the camera's installation, see the documentation on the Basler
Ace website, Basler Ace .
USB dongle parts
Spare part list
-
-
-
Spare part number Description
3HAC072139-001 USB dongle (small)
3HAC073341-001
3HAC039556-001
USB dongle (large)
USB dongle (sim)
Type
The dongle can be connected to any USB interface on host computer.
GigE Network card parts
Spare part list
-
Spare part number Description
3HAC069300-001 GigE network card
Type
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
445
This page is intentionally left blank
9 Circuit diagram
9.1 Circuit diagrams
9 Circuit diagram
9.1 Circuit diagrams
Overview
The circuit diagrams are not included in this manual, but are available for registered users on myABB Business Portal, www.abb.com/myABB .
See the article numbers in the tables below.
Controllers
Product
Circuit diagram - IRC5
Circuit diagram - IRC5 Compact
Article numbers for circuit diagrams
3HAC024480-011
3HAC049406-003
Circuit diagram - IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller
3HAC026871-020
Circuit diagram - Euromap 3HAC024120-004
Circuit diagram - Spot welding cabinet 3HAC057185-001
RobotWare options
Product
Circuit diagram - PickMaster Twin
Article numbers for circuit diagrams
3HAC024480-020
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
447
This page is intentionally left blank
Index
Index
A
B blob
C calibrating
calibration papers, 234 checkerboard, 234
calibration
caliper
cameras
requirements, 22 sensor chip, 22
circle
circular conveyor
color filtering
color space
color spaces
color vision
configurations
configuring
blob sub inspection model, 272
caliper sub inspection model, 277
color space, 292 color vision, 292
external sub inspection model, 282
geometric sub inspection model, 272
histogram sub inspection model, 272
connecting
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
container
controller
conveyor start/stop signal, 94, 97
counts_per_meter
system parameter, 187, 189, 208, 210
D data types
E
emulation
Ethernet card
external sub inspection model, 282
F
firewall settings
focal length
functions
G
GetQueueTopLevel, function, 382
ghost picking
Gigabit Ethernet
description, 21 requirements, 21
grip locations
H histogram
HSI
hue
449
Index
I
I/O
connecting, 37 connections, 37 installed boards, 37
inspection models
instructions
intensity
IP address
item
item source
L lenses
line
M
max_dist, 43 maximum distance, 43
MultiMove
N networks
cables, 40 camera settings, 40
configuring controller, 39, 41
typical settings, controller, 39
NextItmTgtType, instruction, 370
O offline simulation
P pausing
450 robot
PickMaster Host
PickMaster Operator
PickMaster PowerPac
PickMaster Runtime
position available signal, 94, 97, 99
positions
precision time protocol, PTP, 28
PROC.cfg, system parameters, 44
Process
Q
QStartItmSrc, instruction, 372
R recipe
restarting
resuming
RGB
robot
robot controller
S saturation
signals
position available, 94, 97, 99
strobe, 94, 97, 100 trig, 94, 97, 100
six axes robot configuration, 44
standards
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
sub inspection models
geometric PatMax, 272 histogram, 272
switches
SyncSeparation filter distance, 431
system parameters
counts_per_meter, 187, 189, 208, 210
PROC.cfg, 44 six axes robot configuration, 44
T
time syncronization service, 28
U
V vision
vision models
vision system
Gigabit Ethernet, 21 maximum number of cameras, 21 requirements, 21
W
Warning
white balance
work area
Z
Index
Application manual - PickMaster® Twin - PowerPac
3HAC064218-001 Revision: B
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
451
ABB AB
Robotics & Discrete Automation
S-721 68 VÄSTERÅS, Sweden
Telephone +46 (0) 21 344 400
ABB AS
Robotics & Discrete Automation
Nordlysvegen 7, N-4340 BRYNE, Norway
Box 265, N-4349 BRYNE, Norway
Telephone: +47 22 87 2000
ABB Engineering (Shanghai) Ltd.
Robotics & Discrete Automation
No. 4528 Kangxin Highway
PuDong District
SHANGHAI 201319, China
Telephone: +86 21 6105 6666
ABB Inc.
Robotics & Discrete Automation
1250 Brown Road
Auburn Hills, MI 48326
USA
Telephone: +1 248 391 9000 abb.com/robotics
© Copyright 2021 ABB. All rights reserved.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
ดาวน์โหลด
โฆษณา